28292
199
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/223
Pagina verder
Your Local Agent/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya 662-8580, JAPAN
Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111
Fax : +81-(0)798-65-4200
Marine Radar
MODEL 1824C-BB/
1834C-BB/1934C-BB/
1944C-BB/1954C-BB
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
http://www.furuno.co.jp/
FIRST EDITION : JAN. 2005
C
All rights reserved. Printed in Japan
( DAMI ) M1804C-BB, GD1920C-BB
Pub. No. OME-35490
(Elemental Chlorine Free)
The paper used in this manual
is
elemental chlorine free.
MODEL 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB, GD-1920C-BB OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Color Video Plotter
GD-1920C-BB
VX2
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
Turn off the radar power
switch before servicing the
antenna unit. Post a warn-
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna
unit is being serviced.
Prevent the potential risk of
being struck by the rotating
antenna and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.
Wear a safety belt and hard
hat when working on the
antenna unit.
Serious injury or death can
result if someone falls from
the radar antenna mast.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Turn off the power immediately if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip-
ment is emitting smoke or fire.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock.
Use the proper fuse.
Fuse rating is shown on the power cable.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment.
Keep heater away from equipment.
Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
the power cord, which can cause fire or
electrical shock.
A warning label is attached to the
equipment. Do not remove the label.
If the label is missing or damaged,
contact a FURUNO agent or dealer.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230
WARNING
Radio Frequency
Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic
radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never
look directly into the antenna aperture from
a close distance while the radar is in
operation or expose yourself to the trans-
mitting antenna at a close distance.
Distances at which RF radiation levels of
100 and 10 W/m
2
exist are given in the
table below.
Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a
close distance in front of the wheel house,
your administration may require halt of
transmission within a certain sector of
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask
your FURUNO representative or dealer to
provide this feature.
MODEL
Distance to
100 W/m
2
point
Distance to
10 W/m
2
point
MODEL
1834C-BB
Nil
Worst case
1.80 m
MODEL
1934C-BB
MODEL
1944C-BB
Worst case
0.20 m
Worst case
3.00 m
Nil
Worst case
2.50 m
MODEL
1954C-
BB
Nil
Worst case
2.50 m
Worst case
2.30 m
XN-12A
XN-13A
MODEL
1824C-BB
Nil
Worst case
0.50 m
WarningLabel
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ....................................vi
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS .......viii
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW.. 1-1
1.1 Operating Controls..........................1-1
1.1.1 Control unit ..........................1-1
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card....................1-3
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off...................1-4
1.4 Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination...1-5
1.5 Selecting a Display.........................1-6
1.5.1 Display modes.....................1-6
1.5.2 Selecting a display...............1-7
1.5.3 Switching control in
combination and overlay
screens ................................1-8
1.5.4 Selecting image source .......1-9
1.6 Trackball, Cursor...........................1-10
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark,
Setting MOB as Destination ..................1-11
1.8 Data Boxes ...................................1-12
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes
with soft key .......................1-12
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes ....1-12
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a
data box .............................1-12
1.9 Function Keys ...............................1-13
1.10 Simulation Display........................1-14
2. RADAR OPERATION ............. 2-1
2.1 Radar Display .................................2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by....................2-1
2.3 Tuning .............................................2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain ..........................2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter .....................2-3
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works......2-3
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA.........2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter........2-4
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN .......2-4
2.7 Range Scale ...................................2-5
2.8 Pulselength .....................................2-5
2.9 Presentation Mode..........................2-6
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation
mode....................................2-6
2.9.2 Description of presentation
modes..................................2-7
2.10 Measuring the Range .....................2-8
2.10.1 Measuring range by
range rings...........................2-8
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor..2-8
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM....2-9
2.10.4 Various VRM operations......2-9
2.11 Measuring the Bearing..................2-10
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor....
........................................2-10
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL .......
........................................2-10
2.11.3 Various EBL operations .....2-10
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line,
North Marker.................................2-11
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference........2-11
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference........2-11
2.15 Zoom.............................................2-12
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets .......2-12
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets.......
........................................2-13
2.16 Shifting the Picture........................2-14
2.16.1 Manual shift........................2-14
2.16.2 Automatic shift ...................2-14
2.17 Using the Offset EBL ....................2-15
2.17.1 Predicting collision course.2-15
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing
between two targets...........2-16
2.18 Echo Trails ....................................2-17
2.18.1 Trail time ............................2-17
2.18.2 Starting echo trails .............2-18
2.18.3 Trail gradation....................2-18
2.18.4 Trail color ...........................2-18
2.18.5 Echo trail mode..................2-19
2.19 Echo Stretch..................................2-19
2.20 Echo Averaging.............................2-20
2.21 Outputting TLL Data......................2-21
iii
2.22 Guard Alarm..................................2-22
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone ......
........................................2-22
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…....
........................................2-23
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm.......
........................................2-23
2.23 Watchman.....................................2-23
2.23.1 How watchman works........2-23
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman ...2-23
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by
interval ...............................2-24
2.24 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes.....
...........................................2-24
2.25 Waypoint Marker...........................2-25
2.26 ARP, TTM Operation.....................2-26
2.26.1 Activating/deactivating
ARP, TTM...........................2-27
2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets
(ARP) .................................2-27
2.26.3 Displaying target number
(ARP, TTM) ........................2-29
2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP
targets ................................2-29
2.26.5 Setting vector attributes
(ARP) .................................2-30
2.26.6 Displaying past position
(ARP) .................................2-31
2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data ........2-31
2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP).....2-32
2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP).....2-33
2.26.10 Showing, hiding ARP target
tracks .................................2-33
2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display......2-34
2.27.1 False echoes......................2-34
2.27.2 SART (Search and Rescue
Transponder) .....................2-35
2.27.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)......2-36
3. PLOTTER OPERATION ......... 3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays...............................3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display....3-1
3.1.2 Nav graphic display .............3-3
3.1.3 Highway display...................3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display ..................3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode..........................3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display.........................3-9
3.4 Chart Scale .....................................3-9
3.5 Chart Cards.....................................3-9
3.5.1 Chart card overview.............3-9
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlarge-
ment...................................3-10
3.5.3 Navionics GOLD charts .....3-11
3.5.4 C-MAP charts.....................3-14
3.6 Working with Track........................3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track..................3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of
own ship track....................3-19
3.6.3 Changing track color..........3-19
3.6.4 Track plotting method and
interval for own ship track..3-20
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark
distribution setting..............3-21
3.6.6 Erasing track......................3-22
3.7 Marks, Lines..................................3-23
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line..........3-23
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes...3-24
3.7.3 Selecting line type..............3-24
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines ..........3-25
3.8 Waypoints .....................................3-26
3.8.1 Entering waypoints.............3-26
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data.........3-29
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints..............3-30
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size
(Navionics GOLD charts)...3-31
3.8.5 Searching waypoints..........3-32
3.9 Routes...........................................3-33
3.9.1 Creating routes ..................3-33
3.9.2 Connecting routes..............3-36
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints ............3-37
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a
route...................................3-38
3.9.5 Erasing routes....................3-39
3.10 Navigation.....................................3-39
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”.....
........................................3-39
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints.....3-40
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port
services..............................3-41
3.10.4 Following a route................3-43
3.10.5 Canceling route
navigation...........................3-46
i
v
3.11 Alarms...........................................3-47
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off..............3-47
3.11.2 Arrival alarm.......................3-48
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm...........3-49
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error)
alarm..................................3-50
3.11.5 Speed alarm.......................3-50
3.11.6 Proximity alarm..................3-51
3.11.7 Trip alarm...........................3-51
3.11.8 Grounding alarm
(C-MAP specification)........3-52
3.11.9 Alarm information...............3-53
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance ................3-55
4. VIDEO SOUNDER
OPERATION............................. 4-1
4.1 Sounder Displays............................4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display.4-1
4.1.2 Description of sounder
displays................................4-2
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in
combination displays ...........4-6
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation ........4-6
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder
works....................................4-6
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder
modes..................................4-6
4.2.3 How to enable automatic
sounder operation................4-7
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation ............4-7
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode.4-7
4.3.2 Selecting display range .......4-7
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain ................4-8
4.3.4 Shifting the range.................4-8
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time ..................4-9
4.5 Reducing Interference ....................4-9
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise...........4-10
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes ..................4-11
4.8 White Marker ................................4-12
4.9 Picture Advance Speed ................4-12
4.9.1 Advancement independent of
ships speed.......................4-12
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized
with ships speed ...............4-13
4.10 Display Colors...............................4-14
4.11 Alarms...........................................4-15
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off..............4-15
4.11.2 Bottom alarm .....................4-16
4.11.3 Fish alarm ..........................4-16
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L) .................4-17
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm...4-17
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is
violated...............................4-18
4.12 Water Temperature Graph............4-19
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate ..4-19
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card
.............................................................
.............................................................
......................................................4-19
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display..4-20
4.15.1 Zero line.............................4-20
4.15.2 Bottom echo.......................4-20
4.15.3 Fish school echoes............4-21
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration ......4-21
5. ................................................. 5-1
6. DATA TRANSFER................... 6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations ...............6-1
6.1.1 Deleting all data (other than
chart data) from memory
cards ....................................6-1
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory
card......................................6-2
6.1.3 Playing back data from a
memory card........................6-3
6.2 Receiving Data Via Network
Equipment.......................................6-4
6.3 Outputting Data Through the
Network...........................................6-5
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT... 7-1
7.1 General Setup.................................7-1
7.2 Radar Setup....................................7-4
7.2.1 Radar display setup.............7-4
7.2.2 Radar range setup...............7-7
7.2.3 Function key setup...............7-8
7.3 Plotter Setup .................................7-10
7.3.1 Navigation options .............7-10
7.3.2 Function key setup.............7-11
7.4 Chart Setup...................................7-13
7.4.1 Chart offset ........................7-13
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD
chart
attributes ............................7-14
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes ......7-15
7.5 Data Boxes Setup.........................7-21
7.6 Hot Page Setup ............................7-22
v
7.7 Navigator Setup............................7-23
7.7.1 Navigation data source......7-23
7.7.2 GPS receiver setup
(Set equipped with
GP-310B/320B) .................7-25
7.7.3 TD display setup................7-28
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup................7-30
7.9 Sounder Setup..............................7-31
7.9.1 System setup .....................7-31
7.9.2 Sensor setup......................7-34
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range,
bottom lock range ..............7-35
7.9.4 Function key setup.............7-36
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup ..........7-38
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING ............. 8-1
8.1 Preventive Maintenance .................8-1
8.2 Replacement of Batteries ...............8-2
8.3 Replacement of Fuse......................8-2
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron ...............8-3
8.5 Replacing the Synchro Belt
(1824C-BB only) .............................8-3
8.6 Trackball Maintenance....................8-3
8.7 Simple Troubleshooting ..................8-4
8.7.1 General ................................8-4
8.7.2 Radar ...................................8-4
8.7.3 Plotter...................................8-5
8.7.4 Sounder ...............................8-6
8.8 Diagnostics .....................................8-7
8.8.1 Memory I/O test ...................8-7
8.8.2 Test pattern ........................8-10
8.8.3 Keyboard test.....................8-11
8.9 GPS Status Display ......................8-12
8.10 Clearing Memories........................8-13
8.11 Error Messages ............................8-14
APPENDIX ................................. AP-1
Menu Overview.....................................AP-1
Geodetic Chart List.............................AP-10
Icons ...................................................AP-11
SPECIFICATIONS.......................SP-1
INDEX...........................................IN-1
vi
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the Model
18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series Marine Radar,
GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB
Series Marine Radar, GD-1920C-BB Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover
why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our
extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Radar Series and the GD-1920C-BB Video Plotter work within
our network system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate
with NavNet compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an
Ethernet 10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:
This Navnet series consists of the following models:
Model Output Range
Radar antenna size, type,
rotation speed
Marine Radar Model 1824C-BB 2.2 kW 24 rpm 46 cm, radome, 24/30 rpm
(auto-switching)
Marine Radar Model 1834C-BB 4 kW 36 nm 60 cm, radome, 24 rpm
Marine Radar Model 1934C-BB 4 kW 48 nm 3.5 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm
Marine Radar Model 1944C-BB 6 kW 64 nm 4 ft, open, 24 or 48 rpm
Marine Radar Model 1954C-BB 12 kW 72 nm 4/6 ft, open, 24 rpm (4 or 6 ft),
48 rpm (4 ft only)
Color Video Plotter GD-1920C-BB
vii
User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, alphanumeric keys
and Trackball.
Accepts the following SD chart cards: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP NT MAX/eNT
depending on specification. All names mentioned above are registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
Fast chart redraw.
Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
Video input (video recorder, CCD device, etc.) available with installation of optional PIP
Board.
12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally
available, GP-320B with WAAS capability.
User programmable function keys.
Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
The optional facsimile receiver FAX-30 receives facsimile pictures and navtex messages
transmitted from facsimile and navtex stations.
Notice
1. No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.
2. If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
3. The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change without
notice.
4. The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the screens
you see on your display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and
equipment settings.
5. This manual is intended for use by native speakers of English.
6. FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or
modification of the equipment or claims of loss of profit by a third party.
viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product
on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is
assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For
example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures
received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
The number of processor units which may be installed depends on the number of network
sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required
to process data.
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters
Note: NavNet2 equipment cannot be connected to initial version NavNet equipment.
NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB)
Heading sensor
Navigator
Echo sounder
Rectifier
RU-3423
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
12 - 24 VDC*
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
Other NavNet
system
(GD-1920C-BB, etc.)
Antenna Unit
MODEL
1834C-BB
MODEL
1934C-BB
MODEL
1944C-BB
Processor unit
RPU-015
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz*
Monitor
(Local supply)
MODEL
1954C-BB
Control unit
RCU-017
Power Supply
Unit PSU-005
*: The power for the power supply unit
and display unit must be drawn from
the same power source.
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
MODEL1824C-BB
PUSH TO ENTERPUSH TO ENTER
DEFDEF
MNOMNO
VWXVWX
_'#_'#
POWERPOWER
RANGERANGE
TXTX
00
JKLJKL
44
77
STUSTU
55
88
ABCABC
2211
BB
GAINGAIN
ALARMALARM
EBLEBL
VRMVRM
PQRPQR
YZ&YZ&
66
99
DISPDISP
EE
MENUMENU
CC
DD
CLEARCLEAR
GHIGHI
33
SAVESAVE
MOBMOB
HIDEHIDE
SHOWSHOW
AA
POWER
DATA 3
NETWORK
CONT DATA 1DATA 2
DJ-1
SLAVE DISPLAY
RGB OUT
NTSC/PAL
2
GND
3
INPUT
12-24 VDC
1
CARD SLOT
3
2
1
GND
F.G.
12 VDC
OUTPUT
OPTION
ARPA
ARP-11
: Standard
: Option
: Local supply
NavNet system (Model 1824C-BB/1834C-BB/1934C-BB/1944C-BB/1954C-BB)
ix
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)
Network
Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
GPS receiver
GP-310B/320B
12 - 24 VDC
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
Rectifier
PR-62
Navigator
Echo sounder
Monitor
(Local supply)
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
Other NavNet
system
(Model 1834C-BB, etc.)
Processor unit
RPU-015
Control unit
RCU-017
PUSH TO ENTERPUSH TO ENTER
DEFDEF
MNOMNO
VWXVWX
_'#_'#
POWERPOWER
RANGERANGE
TXTX
00
JKLJKL
44
77
STUSTU
55
88
ABCABC
2211
BB
GAINGAIN
ALARMALARM
EBLEBL
VRMVRM
PQRPQR
YZ&YZ&
66
99
DISPDISP
EE
MENUMENU
CC
DD
CLEARCLEAR
GHIGHI
33
SAVESAVE
MOBMOB
HIDEHIDE
SHOWSHOW
AA
POWER
DATA 3
NETWORK
CONT DATA 1DATA 2
DJ-1
SLAVE DISPLAY
RGB OUT
NTSC/PAL
2
GND
3
INPUT
12-24 VDC
1
CARD SLOT
3
2
1
GND
F.G.
12 VDC
OUTPUT
OPTION
ARPA
ARP-11
: Standard
: Option
: Local supply
Heading sensor
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1920C-BB)
x
Two-unit NavNet system
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
Radar, plotter data
Radar, plotter data
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
Two-unit NavNet system
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 units)
HUB
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
(option)
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
Radar Antenna Unit
OR
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
Sounder data
Radar data
Plotter data
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
(option)
Facsimile
Receiver
FAX-30
(option)
Sounder data
Facsimile data
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
RADAR
or
PLOTTER
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar,
video plotter.
1.1 Operating Controls
1.1.1 Control unit
The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the control unit. Ten
keys are labeled and they provide the function shown on their labels. The five soft keys
provide various functions according to current operating mode. The ENTER knob mainly
functions to register selections on the menu and adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The
Trackball’s main function is to move the cursor across the screen. When you correctly
execute an operation, the unit generates a beep. Invalid operation causes the unit to emit
three beeps.
Trackball*
Shifts cursor EBL/VRM and
cursor; selects menu items
and options.
Displays mode
selection window.
Soft keys
Momentary press:
Registers own ship's position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard position.
Opens/closes the main menu.
Radar: Displays soft keys
for adjustment of gain, A/C SEA,
A/C RAIN.
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power off.
Momentary press: Turns power on, and
shows D: RADAR STBY/TX soft key.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers setting.
Rotate: Adjusts gain, VRM, EBL, etc.;
selects menu items and options. May also
be used to enter alphanumeric data.
Clears data;
erases selected mark.
Shows or hides the soft
keys, function keys,
nav data alternately.
Selects a range.
Enter alphanumeric
data.
Displays soft keys for EBL/VRM.
PUSH TO ENTERPUSH TO ENTER
DEFDEF
MNOMNO
VWXVWX
_'#_'#
POWERPOWER
RANGERANGE
TXTX
00
JKLJKL
44
77
STUSTU
55
88
ABCABC
2211
BB
GAINGAIN
ALARMALARM
EBLEBL
VRMVRM
PQRPQR
YZ&YZ&
66
99
DISPDISP
EE
MENUMENU
CC
DD
CLEARCLEAR
GHIGHI
33
SAVESAVE
MOBMOB
HIDEHIDE
SHOWSHOW
AA
*: When it has been some time since the trackball was last operated, the cursor may not track the
movement of the trackball. In this case, move the trackball rapidly and then finely.
Opens/closes
alarm menu.
How to remove the hard cover
Place your thumbs at the locations shown with
circles in the illustration at right, and then lift the
cover while pressing it with your thumbs.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-2
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys (labeled A, B, C, D and E) changes according to the
operation. Their labels for their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the
keys. To hide or show the soft keys, press the HIDE/SHOW key. Each press of the key
shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top of
the screen).
Some soft keys show the current setting of a soft key in reverse video as shown below.
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
Currently selected option shown in reverse video
Radar Display
Plotter Display
16.0nm
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
319. 9
°
M
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
TRAIL
A
TRAIL
ON
/
OFF
TRAIL
TIME
B
C
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
D
RETURNE
E
D. BOX
ON
/
OFF
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
C
NAV
POS
Radar and plotter displays
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-3
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads SD cards, in the following formats: Navionics GOLD charts or C-MAP
NT/eNT MAX charts, depending on the type of processor unit you have. Insert the
appropriate chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart drive.
Chart drive
Processor
unit
2.
Insert desired chart
label side up, before turning on the power.
3. Close the lid.
To remove chart card, push the card once and then pull it out.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple processor units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one
processor unit.
Note 4: Remove the card with care; rough handling can damage the card and destroy its
contents.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-4
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off
Press the POWER/TX key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and then the equipment
shows the startup NavNet screen (about 20 seconds), the product information screen,
startup test results and chart usage disclaimer. During this period the equipment is
inoperative. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for
proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an
appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the
chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “8.8
Diagnostics.”
For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from one and thirty seconds
minute to three minutes (depending or radar model) to warm up before the radar can be
operated. The time remaining for warm up of the magnetron is counted down at the center
of the display.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait
several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the POWER/TX key until the screen goes off
(approx. 3 sec.). Note that the network sounder will be turned off approx. three minutes
after turning off the power. This is due to the equipment’s electrical characteristics.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory
reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated
operation of the equipment after the installation mode selection. Push the ENTER knob to
start the simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start normal operation. For further
details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-5
1.4 Adjusting Hue, Panel Illumination
You may choose the colors for the radar plotter, and overlay displays, and adjust panel
brilliance.
1. Press the POWER/TX key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment of brilliance
and hue appear.
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
BRILL
CONTST
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Radar Display
Plotter Display
BRILL
CONTST
16.0nm
(Blank label of softkey is not used)
(Blank label of softkey is not used)
RETURNE
D
RADAR
STBY
HUEC
PANEL
BRILL
B
RETURNE
D
RADAR
STBY
HUEC
PANEL
BRILL
B
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the C: HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
DAY
NIGHT
TWILIGHT
MANUAL SET
Hue window
3. Operate the Trackball to select hue desired, referring to the table below. MANUAL SET
follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.
Night Day Twilight
Characters Red Black Green
Radar ring Red Green Green
Radar echo Orange Multi Yellow
Background Black White Blue
Landmass (plotter) Orange* Light-orange* Orange*
* = Beige and light-beige on C-MAP display unit.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar
background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this
case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in
black.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-6
4. Press the B: PANEL BRILL soft key to show the panel brilliance window. The bar graph
shows current panel brilliance setting.
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Panel brilliance setting window
5. Adjust the ENTER knob, clockwise to raise the brilliance or counterclockwise to lower it.
6. Hit the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
1.5 Selecting a Display
1.5.1 Display modes
If you have a radar, navigator, network sounder and external video source (video recorder,
etc., optional PIP board required) six full-screen displays are available: radar, plotter, echo
sounder, nav data, overlay, and external video. In addition to the full-screen display, you
can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a
combination display.
Full screen Combination screen Overlay screen
(radar) (radar + plotter)
(plotter + radar only,
requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen Combination screen options
(half- or thirds-screen)
Overlay screen
options
Plotter, radar, sounder,
nav data, external
video, overlay
Plotter, radar, sounder,
compass (or wind), highway,
compass (or wind)/highway,
nav data, overlay, external
video
Radar + plotter
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-7
1.5.2 Selecting a display
1. Press the DISP key to show the display screen selection window. The icons of modes
not available are shaded. HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 6 are user-arrangeable displays
called “hot pages, which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the
paragraph “7.6 Hot Page Setup.”
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVERLAY EXT VIDEO WX FAX
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Basic display
screens
Hot pages
Selected
item
HOTPAGE 1 HOTPAGE 2 HOTPAGE 3 HOTPAGE 4 HOTPAGE 5 HOTPAGE 6
Display screen selection window
Note: “WX FAX” is available only when the facsimile receiver FAX-30 is connected. If
the message “AUX SOURCE IS DISCONNECTED. PUSH ENT KNOB TO EXIT.”
appears, press the ENTER knob and select other item.
2. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. If you select a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear.
In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown. When WX FAX is
selected at step 2, a combination display does not appear.
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
RETURN
Radar combination screen selection window
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select display desired.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-8
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control
between displays. In the example below, the E: PLOTTR CNTRL and E: SNDR CNTRL soft
keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the
plotter/sounder combination display.
To adjust
sounder
To adjust
plotter
Plotterdisplayselected
FISH
WP-002
16.0nm
40.0
97
150
200
50
100
0
0'33"
LF
Sounderdisplayselected
FISH
WP-002
16.0nm
40.0
97
150
200
50
100
0
0'33"
LF
DISPLAY
MODE
D
34°22.3456'N359.9°MTRIPNU
080°22.3456'E
19.9kt99.9nm

34°22.3456'N359.9°MTRIPNU
080°22.3456'E
19.9kt99.9nm
E
C
MODEB
SHIFTA
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
C
NAV
POS
E
EE
CNTRL
PLOTTR
FREQ
LF/HF
CNTRL
PLOTTR
CNTRL
SNDR
CNTRL
SNDR
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-9
1.5.4 Selecting image source
When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you
may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one
network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the DISP key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
SELECT
SOURCE
EDIT
RETURN
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
RADAR SOURCE
1
(HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)
SOUNDER SOURCE
ETR1 (HOST NAME: SOUNDER)
AUX SOURCE AUX 1 (HOST NAME: WXFAX)
IP ADDRESS 172.031.003.003
DEVICE NUMBER 1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET-1)
Select source menu
3. Use the Trackball to select RADAR SOURCE, SOUNDER SOURCE or AUX SOURCE
as appropriate, then press the A: EDIT key.
Radar source
RADAR SOURCE
~ 1 (NAVNET1)
{ 2 (NAVNET2)
{ 3 (NAVNET3)
{ 4 (NAVNET4)
SOUNDER SOURCE
~ ETR0 (SOUNDER)
{ ETR1 (SOUNDER1)
{ ETR2 (SOUNDER2)
{ ETR3 (SOUNDER3)
{ ETR4 (SOUNDER4)
{ ETR5 (SOUNDER5)
{ ETR6 (SOUNDER6)
{ ETR7 (SOUNDER7)
{ ETR8 (SOUNDER8)
{ ETR9 (SOUNDER9)
Sounder source
Aux source
AUX SOURCE
~ AUX1 (WXFAX)
{ AUX2 (WXFAX1)
{ AUX3 (WXFAX2)
{ AUX4 (WXFAX3)
Radar source and sounder source windows
4. Use the Trackball choose source name:
5. Push the ENTER knob to set.
6. Press the DISP key to finish.
7. Turn the power off and on again.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-10
1.6 Trackball, Cursor
The Trackball functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a
location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the Trackball to shift the
cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of Trackball rotation.
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and
bearing from
own ship to
cursor
Cursor
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
15.9 nm 99.9 nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°
M
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Cursor
Cursor Data
Bearing from own ship to cursor
Range from own ship to cursor
Radar Display
Plotter Display
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
SIGNAL
PROC.
A
RADAR
DISPLY
B
NAV
FUNC
C
TARGETD
ZOOM &
D. BOX
E
B
MODE
NTH UP
E
D. BOX
ON
/
OFF
CENTERC
GO TO
CURSOR
D
Cursor, cursor data
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-11
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB mark functions to mark man
overboard position. You can inscribe the
mark from any mode except nav data,
when playing back data or conducting
any test. Note that this function requires
position data.
Note: The function of the SAVE/MOB
key depends on the setting of SAVE
MOB KEY FUNCTION in the GENERAL
SETUP menu. The description below
shows the procedure using the default
setting. For further details, see Save
MOB Key Function on page 7-2.
1. Press and hold down the SAVE/MOB key for about three seconds when someone falls
overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty
waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.
Time remaining is counted down while pressing the SAVE/MOB key.
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
WAYPOINT SAVED!
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XXX = Waypoint number
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XX SEC
XX = Time remaining is counted down.
MOB mark messages
2. Push the ENTER knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the
CLEAR key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB
position as destination;
A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use, with
the range set to 0.5 nm. Further, the waypoint marker appears on the radar display.
The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a blue line runs between it
and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB position.
Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding
waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the CLEAR key followed by
pushing the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.
Man
overboard
Range, bearing
Current
position
MOB
mark
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range
to MOB position
M
(MOB)
M
O
B
162.5°
M
0.49 nm
MOB concept
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-12
1.8 Data Boxes
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display. Up to six
data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are
position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The
user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In
addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar,
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “7.5 Data Boxes
Setup.”
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9°
M
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Data
boxes
Radar Display
47
°
58.535'N
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6
°
M
SOG
20.0
kt
TRIP LOG
177
nm
SIGNAL
PROC.
A
RADAR
DISPLY
B
NAV
FUNC
C
TARGETD
ZOOM &
D. BOX
E
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
Data
boxes
Plotter Display
16.0nm
47
°
58.535'N
122
°
36.496'W
COG
323.6
°
M
SOG
20.0 kt
TRIP LOG
177
nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
C
NAV
POS
E
D. BOX
ON
/
OFF
Data boxes
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
Plotter: E: D. BOX ON/OFF
Radar: E: ZOOM & D. BOX
D: D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: B: AUTO/D. BOX
A: D. BOX ON/OFF
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand”. Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box
If a data box is obscuring a desired object, you may temporarily erase the box. Use the
Trackball to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the CLEAR
key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-13
1.9 Function Keys
The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Default Setting, Key Label Function
Key
Radar Plotter Sounder
#1 Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK TLL output, TLL
#2 Rings on/off, RNG Edit mark/line, EML Clutter, CLT
#3 Echo trail, TRL Ruler, RUL Signal level, SLV
#4 Offcenter, OFC Add new waypoint,
ADD
Noise limiter, NL
#5 STBY/TX, TX Waypoint
alphanumeric list, ALP
Picture advance, PA
Executing a function
1. Press the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key
labels.
Plotter Display
Function
keys
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9nm
BRIDGE
FISH
002WP
Radar Display
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Function
keys
16.0 nm
H
L
A
R
N
G
B
T
R
L
C
S
F
T
D
T
X
E
T
R
K
A
E
M
L
B
R
U
L
C
A
D
D
D
A
L
P
E
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 7.2.3
Plotter: paragraph 7.3.2
Sounder: paragraph 7.9.4
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-14
1.10 Simulation Display
The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides
simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It
allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without
position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative,
thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a
target, etc. Three simulation displays are provided for both the radar and echo sounder.
The simulation icon (SIM) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP and D: SIMULATION
SETUP soft keys in that order.
SIM
SETUP
RADAR LIVE
PLOTTER LIVE
SOUNDER LIVE
SPEED 00.0kt
COURSE 000.0
°
LATITUDE 45
°
35.000'N
LONGITUDE 125
°
00.000'W
START DATE & TIME 00:00 24.NOV.01
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA NO
RETURNE
EDITA
Simulation setup menu
3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages. To stop the simulation mode
and return to normal operation, choose LIVE for radar, sounder or plotter.
Radar
NavNet processor unit-generated echoes or user data
1. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
RADAR
BUILT IN DATA 1
BUILT IN DATA 2
USER DATA
LIVE
2. Select BUILT IN DATA 1 or 2 for internally generated echoes or USER DATA for
user-saved radar data. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-15
NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1920C-BB)
1. Select GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES, then push the ENTER knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The
message “Now getting demo data. Do not turn off processor unit.” appears while the unit
is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found. Cannot get
demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active.
Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal
cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select SIMULATION 2, then push the ENTER knob.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
2. Select SIMULATION, then push the ENTER knob.
3. Select SPEED, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with
the alphanumeric keys, then push the ENTER knob.
5. Select COURSE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a
figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the
Trackball to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85
°
N-85
°
S, default setting, 45
°
35.000’N), then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180
°
E-180
°
W, default setting, 125
°
00.000’W), then push
the ENTER knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the ENTER knob.
14. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
2. Select BUILT IN DATA (internally generated echoes) or
ETR (network sounder-generated echoes), then push the
ENTER knob.
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and
bottom discrimination cannot be shown in the BUILT IN
DATA mode.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
PLOTTER
SIMULATION
LIVE
SOUNDER
BUILT IN DATA
ETR DATA
LIVE
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1-16
This page intentionally left blank.
2-1
2. RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function. ARP
requires a Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit
board.
2.1 Radar Display
TRAIL 30m
02m30s
G1 IN
G2 OUT
ES H
EAV L
IR L
EBL1
27.0°R
VRM1
5.666nm
Range/
range ring
interval
Presentation
mode
Zoom area
Zoom
window
Guard zone 1
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
Interference rejector
Guard zone 2
VRM2
VRM1
EBL1
Range ring
Pulselength
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
Heading line
EBL1 bearing
VRM1 range
Cursor range
and bearing
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
Cursor
Alarm icon
Battery icon
EBL2
327.1°R
VRM2
8.212nm
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
EBL2
Echo averaging
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Own ship vector
(ARP-equipped model,
true vector mode)
North marker
(Head-up, Course-up mode)
S
I
M
Simulation
mode
Radar display
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by
1. Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
2. Press the DISP key to select a radar display.
3. Press the POWER/TX key momentarily.
4. Press the D: RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press
the D: RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-2
2.3 Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is
automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
AUTO
MAN
TUNING
Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN.
5. Adjust the ENTER knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to
re-adjust tuning.
2.4 Adjusting the Gain
The GAIN key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar
to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If your
gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain
yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor
contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
1. Press the GAIN key to show the “gain adjustment”
soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window
appears. The example below shows the gain
sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys
shown depend on radar source as shown below.
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press
the A: GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity
setting window.
3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO
MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as
appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust, while observing the radar
echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
GAIN SENSITIVITY
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
0
Gain sensitivity window
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-3
Adjusting the FTC (When the radar source is the 17x4 series radar)
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the FTC.
In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture
when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less
sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the D: FTC soft key to show the FTC window.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do not
overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.
4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with
random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna
above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance
because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the
left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C
SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the
greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification
will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
A/C SEA adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
Sea clutter at
screen center
Effect of A/C SEA
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-4
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small
targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the B: A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
AUTO ROUGH
AUTO MODERATE
AUTO CALM
MAN
0
A/C SEA setting window
3. Use the Trackball to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN
(manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is
0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
5. When the radar source is the Model 18x4 or 19x4, A/C SEA and A/C RAIN can be
automatically adjusted, with the A/C AUTO ON/OFF soft key. Press the key to highlight
ON or OFF as appropriate. Note that the A/C AUTO adjustment is done at the MANU in
the A/C SEA window.
6. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the
ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain,
snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation clutter shows as
random dots on the screen.
2.6.1 Adjusting the A/C RAIN
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these
unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.
1. Press the GAIN key.
2. Press the C: A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C
RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do
not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
4. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-5
2.7 Range Scale
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your
display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so
that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the
display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
Ring
Interval
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
No. of
Rings
2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Range scales (km)
Range 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
Ring Interval 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
No. of Rings 2 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1824C-BB: 24 nm
Model 1834C-BB: 36 nm
Model 1934C-BB: 48 nm
Model 1944C-BB: 64 nm
Model 1954C-BB: 72 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For
details see paragraph 7.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.
2.8 Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display. Appropriate
pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required
to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is
possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-6
Shown when radar
source is the Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series radar. Not
shown otherwise.
SIGNAL
PROCESS
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
RETURNE
C
A
I. REJ
OFF
B
E. AVG
OFF
D
E. STR
OFF
PULSE
ELONG
Signal process soft keys
3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.
4. Press the C: PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or MEDIUM for
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.9 Presentation Mode
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true
motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
3. Press the A: MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode
and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up, True Motion,
Head-up, and Course-up.
Function Indicator on display Soft key label
North-up N-UP NTH UP
True Motion TR-M TRUE M
Head-up H-UP HD UP
Course-up C-UP CSE UP
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the
heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the
ALARM key to acknowledge the alarm. The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears.
Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the A: MODE soft key to select
presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the CLEAR key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-7
Heading Line
North Marker
Head-up display
HeadingLine
NorthMarker
Course-up display
Heading Line
North
North-up display
Heading Line
North
True motion display
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes
Head-up
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line
connecting the center with the top of the display
indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at
their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Course-up
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the
currently selected course at the top of the screen. As
you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If
you select a new course, the picture resets to display
the new course at the top of the display.
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in
their directions relative to the intended course which is
maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line
moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course
changes.
North-up
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their
measured distances and in their true (compass)
directions from own ship. North is maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its
direction according to ship’s heading.
True motion
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the
screen, while your own ship moves across the radar
image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in
true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses.
As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the
screen, the radar display is automatically reset to
reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually
reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the
B: RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the B: SHIFT
soft key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-8
2.10 Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor,
and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest
ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the C: RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor
Operate the Trackball to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar target.
The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the bottom of
the display.
11.2 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Cursor
Target
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
319. 9
°
M
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
SIGNAL
PROC.
A
RADAR
DISPLY
B
NAV
FUNC
C
TARGETD
ZOOM &
D. BOX
E
How to measure range to a target with the cursor
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-9
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the B: VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or E: VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key
to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen,
is highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob then place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read
the VRM indication to find range to the target.
EBL
VRM
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
VRM1
(Dotted line)
VRM2
(Dashed line)
VRM1 range
Active VRM is highlighted.
EBL1
---.-°R
VRM1
3.123nm
EBL2
---.-°R
VRM2
9.343nm
VRM2 range
319. 9
°
M
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
EBL1
ON
A
VRM1
ON
B
EBL2
ON
D
VRM2
ON
E
OFFSETC
How to measure range with the VRM
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
2.10.4 Various VRM operations
Erasing a VRM, VRM indication: Press appropriate VRM soft key (B or E key), then press
the CLEAR key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the EBL or VRM soft key (B or E key) associated
with the EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the CLEAR key once or twice to
erase the data box.
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX and D: D. BOX ON/OFF soft
keys to show or hide the EBL/VRM data boxes.
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes: When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you
want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done
when the EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the Trackball, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the Trackball to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-10
2.11 Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the EBL
(Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target
appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the EBL/VRM key.
2. Press the A: EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or D: EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to
select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the EBL indication
to find the bearing to the target.
EBL
VRM
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
EBL1
(Dotted line)
EBL2
(Dashed line)
EBL2 bearing
Active marker is highlighted.
EBL1 bearing
EBL1
330.1°R
VRM1
-.---nm
EBL2
234.1˚R
VRM2
-.---nm
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
EBL1
ON
A
VRM1
ON
B
EBL2
ON
D
OFFSETC
VRM2
ON
E
How to measure bearing with the EBL
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or
True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with “EBL REFERENCE,” which is
in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
2.11.3 Various EBL operations
Erasing an EBL, EBL indication: Press appropriate EBL soft key (B or E key), then press
the CLEAR key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing, hiding, moving EBL/VRM data boxes: See paragraph 2.10.4.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-11
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the
own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees
on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up
and true motion modes with ship’s movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the
north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft
key followed by the D: HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the
radar soft keys are not shown, hit the CLEAR key to display them.)
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the
same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots
either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the
edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because
they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may
be missed.
Radar interference
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-12
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
Shown when radar
source is the Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series radar. Not
shown otherwise.
SIGNAL
PROCESS
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
RETURNE
C
A
I. REJ
OFF
B
E. AVG
OFF
D
E. STR
OFF
PULSE
ELONG
SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys
3. Press the A: I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level
desired; LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector
is on.
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the “zoom
square.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display
is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
3. Press the E: ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
4. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A hollow square, called the “zoom
area,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the B: CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The hollow square
changes to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the
Trackball, then press the B: CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-13
ZOOM &
D. BOX
12/
HU
3nm
LP
319. 9
°
M
Zoom area
Zoom window
Requires optional
ARP Board in
Model 18x40-BB/19x4-BB
series network radar.
Not shown otherwise.
359.9 ˚R
5.727
nm
+
RETURNE
D
D. BOX
ON
/
OFF
A
ZOOM
ON
/
OFF
B
CURSOR
FLOAT
ARP
TGT ZM
C
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can
come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM
message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP
capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by
enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
3. Press the A: ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.
4. Press the C: ARP TGT ZM soft key.
1
SELECTTARGETNO.
Target no. selection window
5. Use the ENTER knob to select number (1-10), then push the ENTER knob. If the target
number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.
.
To cancel, press the B: CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the
radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-14
Cursor
Place cursor
where desired.
Press the A: MANUAL
soft key.
SHIFT
Manual shift
AUTO SHIP SPEED
15
2.16 Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can
be displaced manually or automatically
to expand the view field without
switching to a larger scale. Zoom is not
available when the display is shifted.
2.16.1 Manual shift
The sweep origin can be shifted in any
presentation mode to a point specified
by the cursor by up to 50% of the
range in use in any direction.
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
4. Press the B: SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the A: MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location.
SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
To cancel shift, press the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.
2.16.2 Automatic shift
The amount of automatic shift is calculated according to ship’s speed, and the amount of
shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift speed setting for
15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots the amount of shift will be about 34%. The
formula for determining shift amount is as shown below. Automatic shift mode is only
available in the head-up mode.
Ship's speed
Shift speed setting
X 0.5 = Amount of shift(%)
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the B: RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the B: SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
4. Press the C: AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto
ship speed setting window.
5. Adjust the Trackball or ENTER knob to set the
maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the
ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key to set. The setting range is 1-999 kt and the
default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the B: AUTO soft key to automatically shift the sweep origin. To cancel shift, press
the B: RADAR DISPLY, B: SHIFT and D: OFF soft keys.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-15
2.17 Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to
measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision
course with your vessel.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which
is marked with an “X.”
4. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be on
a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the ENTER knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the ENTER knob so the
EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the
center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with
your vessel.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.
EBL
VRM
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Initial target
position
Target tracked
here
EBL1
45.0˚R
VRM1
-.---nm
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
EBL1
ON
A
VRM1
ON
B
EBL2
ON
D
VRM2
ON
E
OFFSETC
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-16
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two
targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target “A.”
2. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3. Press the A: EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
4. Press the C: OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which
is marked with an “X.”
5. Rotate the ENTER knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
6. Push the ENTER knob, then press the B: VRM1 ON soft key.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B.”
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the
two targets.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the C: OFFSET soft key.
EBL
VRM
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Target A
Target B
Bearing and range
between target A
and target B
EBL1
45.0°R
VRM1
7.121nm
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
EBL1
ON
A
VRM1
ON
B
EBL2
ON
D
VRM2
ON
E
OFFSETC
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-17
2.18 Echo Trails
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative
or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
2.18.1 Trail time
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key to show the trail soft keys.
TRAIL
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°
M
TRAIL
TIME
B
C
GRAD
SINGLE
TRAIL
COLOR
D
RETURNE
A
TRAIL
ON
/
OFF
Trail soft keys
4. Press the B: TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
15 seconds
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
CONTINUOUS
Trail time window
5. Use the Trackball to select time desired.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-18
2.18.2 Starting echo trails
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Press the A: TRAIL soft key.
4. Press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner
of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets. Trails are restarted when
the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero
and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the A: TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the
above procedure.
2.18.3 Trail gradation
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the
trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW soft key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET and A: TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the C: GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice to finish.
Multitone Monotone
Multitone and monotone trails
2.18.4 Trail color
Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET, A: TRAIL and D: TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.
TRAIL COLOR
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
Trail color window
3. Use the Trackball to select the color desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-19
2.18.5 Echo trail mode
Echo trails can be shown in Relative or True motion. (True trails require heading and speed
inputs.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP key.
3. Choose A: TRAIL MODE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
TRAIL MODE
TRUE
RELATIVE
Trail mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.19 Echo Stretch
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker
and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The
echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch
are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which
stretches them in both range and bearing directions.
"LOW" Echo stretch "HIGH" Echo stretch
Bearing
direction
Bearing
direction
Range
direction
Echo Stretch OFF
Target
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this
reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating
the echo stretch.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the B: E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-20
2.20 Echo Averaging
The echo average feature, which requires a Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar,
effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as ships
appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna. On
the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan
correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive
picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea
clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it
easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter
with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the A: SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the B: E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF: No averaging
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable
echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.
(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-21
2.21 Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen
with the TLL mark (X). This function requires position and heading data.
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to
output.
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
Requires ARP circuit board
in Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series
NavNet radar. Not shown
otherwise.
TARGET
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
ACQC
TARGET
INFO
D
RETURNE
TRAILA
TLL
OUTPUT
B
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the B: TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TLL mark
appears on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the B: TLL OUTPUT
soft key was pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet
units, under the youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL
from another NavNet unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-22
2.22 Guard Alarm
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone.
When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and
the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.
CAUTION
The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the ALARM key.
2. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the
guard zone you want to set, then press the A: SET GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft
key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the Trackball to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of the
guard zone area, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner
for guard zone and press the A: SET
GUARD1 or C: SET GUARD2 soft key.
The soft keys disappear and the instruction
box appears at left-hand cursor.
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
corner for guard zone and press the ENTER knob.
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°M
317.2 ˚R
11.60
nm
+
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
39.9 ˚R
8.800
nm
+
NO ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
GUARD 1
319. 9
°M
1
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH
KNOB TO SET.
2
RETURNE
SET
GUARD1
A
SET
GUARD2
C
RETURNE
SET
GUARD1
A
SET
GUARD2
C
ERASE
GUARD1
B
How to set a guard alarm zone
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm
type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward
guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target
is found, the guard zone type becomes an “Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering
the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or
G1(G2) OUT.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-23
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range “G1 (G2) IN” or “G1 (G2)
OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not available while this
indication appears.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard
alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm
icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED INTO
GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm.
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the B: ERASE GUARD1 or D: ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for
targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio
alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into
standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This
feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be
alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when
Watchman is active.
ST-BY
5,10
or
20 min
Tx
1 min
Tx
1 min
Watchman
starts
5,10
or
20 min
ST-BY
*
*
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman
1. Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)
2. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.
4. Press the A: W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-24
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE
SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then
set a guard zone.
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can
be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
WATCHMANTIME

5minutes
10minutes
20minutes
Watchman window
4. Select time desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.24 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes
In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets may appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received one
transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.
Second-trace
echo
Tx repetition
Actual range
False echo
range
Second-trace echoes
To activate or deactivate the second-trace echo rejector do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Use the Trackball to select 2ND ECHO REJECTION, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Choose ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-25
2.25 Waypoint Marker
A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may
be inscribed on the radar display.
NAV
FUNC
12/
HU
L 3nm
SP
319. 9
°
M
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
Waypoint
marker
A
W. MAN
ON
/
OFF
RETURNE
B
WPT MK
ON
/
OFF
Waypoint marker
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the C: NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the B: WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-26
2.26 ARP, TTM Operation
When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB series network radar,
you can manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired
automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO
heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence “RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM
(Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the processor unit.
However, targets cannot be acquired.
Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main
radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.
Usage precautions for ARP
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
A target does not always mean a land-
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
Echo intensity
Radar transmission pulsewidth
Radar bearing error
Gyrocompass error
Course change (own ship or target)
CAUTION
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-27
2.26.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
ARP
SETUP
ARP TARGET INFO INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS NO
ARP VECTOR MODE TRUE
ARP VECTOR TIME 30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL OFF
CPA OFF
TCPA 30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER OFF
RETURNE
EDITA
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP target info
window.
ARP TARGET INFO
INTERNAL ARP
EXTERNAL ARP
OFF
ARP target info window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be an ARP-equipped Model 18x4-BB/19x4-BB
series NavNet radar. Select this item also for a NavNet unit being fed ARP targets.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port. Target
tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to
acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY TRACKING 10 TARGETS!”
appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary
target as shown in the paragraph “2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”
Manual acquisition
When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five targets may be
acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the alert message appears.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-28
Automaticacquisitionarea
45° port
45° starboard
2.0-2.5nm
Automatic acquisition area
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the D: TARGET soft key.
3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire.
4. Press the C: ACQ soft key.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after
acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Atacquisition 1min.after
acquisition
3min.after
acquisition
01*
01*
01*
Vector
*=TargetnumbershownwhenTARGETIDNUMBERis
turnedonintheARPSETUPmenu.
TargetNumber
ARP plot symbols
Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark appears one
minute after acquisition.
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets
automatically by setting an automatic
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is
selected after acquiring targets manually, only
the remaining capacity for targets may be
automatically acquired. For example, if seven
targets have been manually acquired, three
targets may be automatically acquired.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main
menu.
2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the Trackball to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
ON
OFF
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range
and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when
switching to manual acquisition.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-29
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
YES
NO
Cancel all targets window
2.26.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
TARGET
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
ARP
Target
Number
01
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°T
RETURNE
TARGET
INFO
D
TRAILA
TLL
OUTPUT
B
ACQC
ARP target number
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are
cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more
individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the CLEAR key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP
soft key.
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select YES.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU
key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-30
2.26.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course
of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected
vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate
the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30
minutes.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
2. Operate the Trackball to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARPVECTORMODE
RELATIVE
TRUE
ARP vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector
time window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
15 minutes
30 minutes
ARP vector time window
7. Operate the Trackball to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15 min
and 30 min.
8. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-31
2.26.6 Displaying past position (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of
any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a)Shipturning
(b)Shiprunning
straight
(c)Shipreduced
speed
(d)Shipincreased
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the Trackball to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
OFF
30 seconds
1 minute
3 minutes
6 minutes
History interval window
4. Operate the Trackball to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.7 ARP, TTM target data
You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for ARP or
TTM targets. Note that TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu, must be turned on
to display this data.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the D: TARGET and D: TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target
appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is
displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press
the CLEAR key.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-32
TARGET
359.9 ˚R
11.70
nm
+
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9˚T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2.21nm TCPA 12:35
ARP
Target
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
Cursor
01
12/
H-UP
3nm
LP
319. 9
°T
RETURNE
TARGET
INFO
D
TRAILA
TLL
OUTPUT
B
ACQC
ARP target data
2.26.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the
speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target
changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm
with the CLEAR key. Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM”
appears. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of
the triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The
ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and
predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detect-
ing the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-33
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm
range:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: ARP SETUP soft
key.
2. Operate the Trackball to select CPA.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3
nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the Trackball.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu
reappears.
6. Operate the Trackball to select TCPA.
7. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4
min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2.26.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol
becomes a diamond and tracking is discontinued after one
minute.
01
Lost target mark
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
2.26.10 Showing, hiding ARP target tracks
ARP target tracks may be shown or hidden as follows
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:
ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
CPA
{
{
{
{
{
{
~
OFF
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
5nm
6nm
CPA distance
TCPA
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
~
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
TCPA time
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-34
2.27 Interpreting the Radar Display
2.27.1 False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if
you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted
pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A
second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or
other multiples of the actual range of the
target as shown below. Multiple reflection
echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain
(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C
SEA control.
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted,
some radiation escapes on each side of
the beam. This stray RF is called a
“sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can
be detected by the sidelobes as well as
the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo
at the same range. Sidelobes show
usually only on short ranges and from
strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or
proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship
may show at two positions on the screen.
One of them is the true echo directly
reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror
effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your
ship comes close to a large metal bridge,
for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on the screen.
Virtual image
Own ship
Target
Tr ue
echo
Multiple
echo
Multiple echoes
Target B
(True)
Target B
(Spurious)
Target A
Sidelobe echoes
Tr ue
echo
False
echo
Own
ship
Target ship
Mirror image
of target ship
Virtual image
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-35
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
Shadow sector
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the
antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended
at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced.
Within this sector, targets can not be detected.
2.27.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar
within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When
interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through the band before beginning a relatively
slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is
repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART
frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar
receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced
by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the
12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which
also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.
They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
Radar antenna
beamwidth
Screen A: When SART
is distant
Screen B: When SART
is close
Lines of 12
dots are
displayed in
concentric
Echo from SART
Position of
SART
Own ship
position
Own ship
position
SART mark
length
Radar receiver
bandwidth
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Low speed sweep signal
24 NM
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Echo from
SART
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2. RADAR OPERATION
2-36
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is
about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
2.27.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a
ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same
frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's
radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the
position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially
from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
3-1
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1 Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the
radar display, or in a combination screen.
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
BRIDGE
FISH
002WPT
Nav data window
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor
status. For details see next page.)
Course bar
Soft keys
Track
Own ship
marker
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
page A-12
for details.)
Waypoint name
Waypoint marker
Scale
16.0nm
S
I
M
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
C
NAV
POS
E
D. BOX
ON
/ OFF
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device
feeding position data:
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B: Alarm icon (
) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own
ship marker blinks faster.
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural
alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message
“NO POSITION DATA” appears.
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the C: NAV soft key and
the cursor.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-2
359. 9°
M
359. 9 °
M
79. 9°F NU
19. 9kt 99. 9nm 345 ft
Bearing to Waypoint
Course, Speed
Range
to
Waypoint
Water Temp.*,
Depth*
CSE
SOG
BRG
RNG
TMP
DPT
NAV
S/C
soft key
Presentation
Mode
Own Ship Mark Speed
Trip Distance
NAV
POS
soft key
34°24. 3456'N 359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
124°24. 3456'W 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
CourseLatitude, Longitude
Presentation
Mode
Own ship
position
Own ship
speed and
course
NAV
OFF
soft key
Turns off
nav data
window
* Requires appropriate
sensor.
34°24. 3456'N 359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
124°24. 3456'W 59.9nm 99. 9nm
Bearing to Cursor
Latitude, Longitude
Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
+
Cursor Mark
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
Range to
Cursor
359. 9°
M
TTG4D02H23M NU
19. 9nm
ETA1st 13:45
Bearing to WaypointWaypoint Name
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Range to Waypoint
Waypoint Mark
001WPT
Presentation
Mode
NAV
WPT
soft key
Destination
waypoint
data
Time-to-Go
to Destination
359. 9°
M
359. 9°
M
TRIP
NU
19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
CourseBearing to WaypointWaypoint Name
001WPT
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected
with cursor)
Presentation
Mode
SpeedRange to WaypointWaypoint Mark Trip Distance
Contents of nav data window
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-3
3.1.2 Nav graphic display
The nav graphic display shows the compass display or the wind display depending on the
setting of GRAPHIC METER in the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu. For further
details see paragraph 6.10.
Compass display
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The
compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black
triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the
latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50
feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth. You may adjust the update interval for these
graphs on the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu.
Bearing scale
XTE monitor
(See next page for
description.)
Depth
graph*
Water
temperature
graph*
Time-to-go
to destination
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Ship's course
(red)
Destination
waypoint
Range to destination waypoint
Speed over ground
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Destination
waypoint
bearing
(black)
0
50
20
10
BRG
DPT
TMP
359.9°
M
45.2ft
16.2°F
359.9°M
003WPT
0D 9H 59MTTG 23th23:59
ETA
SOG
10.0kt 10.0 kt
STW
RNG
99.9nm
N
w
E
Speed through water
CSE
Direction to steer
(green)
Shown (in red
on color model)
when direction to
steer is "left."
Own ship marker
(Black when within
XTE range, yellow when over.)
Compass display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-4
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course
and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to
direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error
is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or
left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course.
It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the
example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course,
steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
E: COMPSS CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch
control to the compass display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to select COMPSS.
C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how
to set.
A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is
set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. The
following message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WPT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key to
display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window
2. Use the Trackball to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by
pressing the CLEAR key.
3. Enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
4. Push the ENTER knob to set, or press the E: CANCEL soft key to cancel.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-5
Anemometer display
The anemometer display shows mostly the same data as the compass display. The wind
meter in the center of the display shows wind speed in the bow direction, in graphic and
analog forms.
QP<01>
RNG 4259nm4259nm
SOG
20.0kt STW 20.2kt
TTG *D *H *M ETA * *: *
DPT
TMP
WIND SPEED
12.3kt
123ft 12.3°C
45° S
WIND APPARENT
Anemometer display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-6
3.1.3 Highway display
The highway display, shown in combination displays, provides a graphic presentation of
ship’s track along intended course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a
waypoint. The own ship marker shows the relation between ship and intended course. The
XTE monitor shows the direction and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows
the direction to steer to return to your course and the numeric the distance you are off
course. Using the figure below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to
course. To maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the
intended course line.
Time-to-go
to destination
Range to destination waypoint
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Destination
waypoint
XTE monitor
XTE range
0.9 nm
WPT001
WPT001
0D 9H 59MTTG 23th23:59ETA
SOG
10.0
kt
10.0
kt
STW
RNG 99.9 nm
0.009nm
0.9 nm
Intended course
Speed over ground,
speed through water
Destination
waypoint
Direction to steer
(green)
Own ship marker
Shown (in red) when
direction to steer
is "left."
Highway display
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
E: HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch
control to the highway display by pressing the E: CNTRL soft key to show HIWAY.
C: EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous
page for how to set.
A: RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is
set. Press the C: EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the A: RESET XTE soft key. See the
previous page for details.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-7
3.1.4 Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a
three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to
display it. For details see the paragraph “7.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not
connected.
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N
120° 34. 5678'
W
SOGWPT POSITION
COURSESTW
10.0 kt
RANGEBEARING
9.2° M
TEMPDEPTH
Speed over ground
Position
Water temperature
Range to
waypoint
Course
Speed through
water
Bearing to
Waypoint
Waypoint
Position
Depth
34° 14. 5678' N
120° 14. 5678'
W
10.0 kt
101.6° M
0.18 nm
1324.1 ft
18.2 °C
Nav data displays
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-8
3.2 Presentation Mode
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up
and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the HIDE/SHOW key followed
by the B: MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and
presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence
of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
For C-map model, the sequence is North-up, Perspective, Course-up and Auto course-up
when PERSPECTIVE DISPLAY is set to ON, on the CHART DETAILS menu. (See Chapter
7.)
North-up
North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle.
This mode is useful for long-range navigation.
Course-up
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring
ship’s progress towards a waypoint. The
destination is at the top of the screen when a
destination is set. When no destination is set,
the course or heading is at the top of the screen
at the moment the course-up mode is selected.
A filled triangle marks own ship’s position.
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must
be output from the NavNet unit connected to the
GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the
own ship marker in the course-up mode on other
NavNet units.
Auto course-up
The course is at the top of screen at the moment
the auto course-up mode is selected. In this
mode, the current course is kept at the top of the
screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees.
For example, if your vessel turns larger than
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart
display will rotate so that your course is pointing
towards the top of the screen again. A filled
triangle marks own ship’s position.
Perspective (C-map only)
Chart data is projected in perspective mode, for
3D simulation, during navigation.
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34°22.3456'N359.9°
M

TRIP
NU
080°22.3456'E
19.9kt99.9nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
C
NAV
POS
E
D.BOX
ON
/ OFF
North-up
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°M
TRIP
CU
080° 22. 3456'E
15.9 nm 99.9 nm
+
WPT 001
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
GO TO
CURSOR
D
CENTERC
B
MODE
CSE UP
E
D.BOX
ON /OFF
Course-up
34° 22. 3456'N 272.4°
M
TRIP
CU
080° 22. 3456'E
15.9 nm 99.9 nm
+
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
A
E
D.BOX
ON
/ OFF
GO TO
CURSOR
D
CENTERC
B
MODE
AT CU
Auto course-up
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-9
3.3 Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Use the Trackball to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the
direction opposite of cursor location.
2. To turn off the cursor, press the C: CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship
marker to the screen center.
3.4 Chart Scale
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The
[-] key shrinks the chart range (image is expanded); the [+] key expands the cart
range (image is shrunk). The available ranges are as below.
Charts scales
nm 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048
km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6 59.3 119 237 474 948 1896 3792
sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4 36.8 73.7 147 295 589 1178 2356
3.5 Chart Cards
3.5.1 Chart card overview
Your system reads Navionics GOLD charts
or C-MAP NT MAX charts, depending on
the type of processor unit you have.
When you insert a suitable chart card in
the slot and own ship is near any
cartographic object, a chart appears. If a
wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart
scale is selected, landmasses will appear
hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the
display to help you select a suitable chart
scale. The table below shows the chart
icons and their meanings.
Icon Meaning
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Suitable chart scale is
selected.
Chart icons and their meanings
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-10
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement
When the RANGE key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These
frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the
current range.
Sample chart (Japan), showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed:
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
When the chart scale is too large or too small.
When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page
7-14 for Navionics GOLD charts and page 7-16 for C-MAP charts.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-11
3.5.3 Navionics GOLD charts
Data for aids to navigation
Selected Navionics GOLD charts can show buoy and lighthouse data. Simply place the
cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse Buoy
Place the cursor on
a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark (U.S> Point layers presentation)
Port service icons
Selected Navionics GOLD charts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor)
desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Roll the Trackball horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display. The
services available appear directly below the icon selected.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
Emergency
medical service
Water
supply station
Customer
service station
Information center
Fueling station
Traveler's
service station
Marine
equipment service
Port
RETURN
FIRST AID
Sailboat icon (Port)
Detailed information of service
selected
List of services
at the port selected
16.0nm
E
SHOW
PORT
c
GOTO
PORT
B
Plotter display, showing port service display
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-12
34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
+
Time: 04:35
Speed (KT): 0.45ft
Angle ( ): 142
21/08/02 +00
Moonphase: FULLY IN 1 DAY
Sunrise: 05:03 Moonrise: 14:06
Sunset: 19:10 Moonset: 02:15
0.86
0.74
0.61
0.48
0.35
048
12
16 20 24
Current
Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack
KT AT
Flood 4:58 1.2 323 7:58
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
RETURNE
DATEA
Current data display
Current (or tide) data
Some Navionics GOLD charts provide for
calculation of the current (or tide) data for any
date. Additionally it displays the time of sunrise
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a
current icon (
T
).
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the current
window.
3. Press the A: DATE soft key, and then enter
the date desired.
4. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
Object information
You can see detailed information about a place selected by the cursor as below.
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the location you desire to know more about.
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the OBJECT INFORMATION window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
+
RETURN
FIND
OBJECT INFORMATION
WRECKS
BLOCK AND TACKLE
BOATYARD
LAND AREA
DERDGED AREA
DEPTH AREA
POSITION
47 16.461'N
122 25.153'W
BRG. & RNG.
191 T 0.549nm
VALUE OF SOUNDING
62.2m
VERTICAL DATUM
MEAN SEA LEVEL
MOVE TRACKBALL <-/->)
A
E
Object information window
When there are two or more pages, roll the trackball rightward to show the next page.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-13
FIND function
When the OBJECT INFORMATION window is shown, objects can be listed according to
their categories.
1. Press the A: FIND soft key with the OBJECT INFORMATION window shown.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
+
FIND ...
PORT LIST
PORT SERVICE
TIDE STATIONS
CURRENT STATIONS
OBSTRUCTION
ROCKS
WRECKS
CANCEL
ENTER
C
E
FIND window
2. Operate the trackball to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER knob.
Note: You can show the selected object on the plotter display by pressing the SHOW soft
key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-14
3.5.4 C-MAP charts
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show
information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In
addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Move the Trackball to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Spot Sounding
Depth area
Exclusive economic zone
Military practice area
Restricted area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.
5. Push the ENTER knob to display details for object selected.
Depth area
Depth range value1
0.00 Meters
Depth range value2
1829.00 Meters
Example of caution area window
6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to close the window.
7. Press the E: CANCEL soft key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-15
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°
M
TRIP
NU
080° 22. 3456'E
19.9 kt 99.9 nm
+
16.0nm
+
MARK
ENTRY
A
B
MODE
NTH UP
E
D. BOX
ON
/
OFF
CENTERC
GO TO
CURSOR
D
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the ENTER knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a
lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Rock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the Trackball to select the item desired.
4. Push the ENTER knob to display detailed information.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-16
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Sample lighthouse data
5. If necessary, move the Trackball downward or upward to scroll the window.
6. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to finish.
Tide information
The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on a Tide icon (
T
).
2. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9 NU
124 24. 3456 W 59.9 024nm
+
OBJECTS
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
T
RETURNE
ENTERC
Objects window
3. Use the Trackball to select Tide height.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TIDE window.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-17
Objects
Port area
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Public toilets
Public telephone
C-map, port service displa
y
Objects
Port area
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Pubric toilets
Pubric telephone
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
124 24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024n
+
Time: 04:35
Height: 0.45ft
Draught: 0.65ft
28/10/03 -05
43° 32.860N
010° 18.022E
Port information
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max)
0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min)
0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise
07:52L
Sunset
16:53 L
0.86
0.74
0.61
0.48
0.35
048
12
16 20 24
Vertical
Cursor
Horizontal
Cursor
TIDE
RETURNE
DATEA
Tide window
5. Press the A: DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
2 8. 10. 1998
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
Date window
6. Use the Trackball to position the cursor where desired, then enter date with the
alphanumeric keys. Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the ENTER knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.
8. Use the Trackball to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.
9. Use the Trackball to shift the horizontal cursor to select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications in left of the tide graph for tide information.
11. Press the E: CANCEL soft key twice to close the TIDE window.
Port service icons
Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports, with
lists.
1. Use the Trackball to place the cursor on the sailboat
icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.
2. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Select the service name desired. The services available
appear.
4. Press the E: CANCEL soft key.
Note: When Port/Marine is selected, you can show a
picture of the port selected, provided such data is available
on the chart card.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-18
3.6 Working with Track
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing
equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to
changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is
displayed in red.
3.6.1 Displaying track
Own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR WHITE
INTERVAL TIME
TIME INTERVAL 00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL 00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) 2000 POINTS
(MARK MEMORY) (6000)POINTS
SHIP'S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
RETURNE
EDITA
MARK
SETUP
D
ERASE
T & M
C
B
TRACK
RESUME
Track control menu
2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
4. Use the Trackball to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234
points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned
on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
7. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
8. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
9. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-19
10. Use the Trackball to select one of the following:
ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
11. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
12. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track.
You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
TRACK
CONTROL
Trackisplotted
Tracknotplotted
OWNSHIPTRACKDISP ON
OWNSHIPTRACKCOLORRED
TARGETTRACKDISPLAY ON
TARGETTRACKCOLOR WHITE
INTERVAL TIME
TIMEINTERVAL 00m10s
DISTANCEINTERVAL 00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK&MARK) 2000POINTS
(MARKMEMORY) (6000)POINTS
SHIP'STRACKSTATUS
NOTTRACKING
TRACK:1234/2000
MARK:9/6000
OWNSHIPTRACKDISP ON
OWNSHIPTRACKCOLORRED
TARGETTRACKDISPLAY ON
TARGETTRACKCOLOR WHITE
INTERVAL TIME
TIMEINTERVAL 00m10s
DISTANCEINTERVAL 00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK&MARK) 2000POINTS
(MARKMEMORY) (6000)POINTS
SHIP'STRACKSTATUS
TRACKING
TRACK:1234/2000
MARK:9/6000
RETURNE
EDITA EDITA
MARK
SETUP
D
ERASE
T & M
C
RETURNE
MARK
SETUP
D
ERASE
T & M
C
B
TRACK
RESUME
B
TRACK
RESUME
B
TRACK
HALT
B
TRACK
HALT
Track control menu
2. Press the B: TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK HALT” and
the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT
TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and
own ship marker becomes a hollow circle. To restart plotting the track, press the B:
TRACK HALT soft key
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.3 Changing track color
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between
previous day’s track, etc.
Own ship’s track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-20
TRACK COLOR
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Own ship track color window
4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white (default setting).
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the Trackball to select the color desired.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is
stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides
for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the
track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
INTERVAL
TIME
DISTANCE
Interval window
4. Use the Trackball to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for
conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-21
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as appropriate.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on
what you selected at step 2.
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
Setting range: 0.00 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.0 nm
TIMEINTERVAL
DISTANCEINTERVAL
Interval windows
4. Use the Trackball to select digit and enter value with the alphanumeric keys. The D:
CLEAR soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be
distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and 6000 points for
marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased.
If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP and B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
2000/8000 POINTS
TRACKMEMORY
Track memory window
4. Use the Trackball to select digit and use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-22
5. Push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to
change the track memory capacity.
6. Push the ENTER knob.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.6.6 Erasing track
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase
ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the
overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE
ERASEALLTRACKS
ERASETRACKSBYAREA
ERASETRACKSBYCOLOR
ERASETARGETTRACKS
ERASEALLMARKS/LINES
ERASEMARKSBYAREA
SHIP'STRACKSTATUS
TRACKING
TRACK:1234/2000
MARK:9/6000
RETURNE
EDITA
Erase menu
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft
key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to ease track from.
4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease
track from.
6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob.
7. Push the ENTER knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing own ship track by color
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-23
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Erase track by color window
3. Use the Trackball to select the color you want to erase, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to erase the track color selected.
5. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all own ship track.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7 Marks, Lines
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot. Marks can be
inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white.
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key (if necessary) followed by the A: MARK ENTRY soft key.
The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The
default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle (
).
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-24
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes
You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP
soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINESCOLOR YELLOW
MARKSSHAPE
LINESSTYLE .
MARKSSIZE LARGE
SHIP'STRACKSTATUS
TRACKING
TRACK:1234/2000
MARK:9/6000
RETURNE
EDITA
Marks & lines menu
3. Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
MARKS SHAPE
Marks shape window
7. Use the Trackball to select mark shape desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
9. Use the Trackball to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.
10. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
11. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.3 Selecting line type
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc. You can
even construct simple charts.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and D: MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-25
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINESCOLOR YELLOW
MARKSSHAPE
LINESSTYLE .
MARKSSIZE LARGE
SHIP'STRACKSTATUS
TRACKING
TRACK:1234/2000
MARK:9/6000
RETURNE
EDITA
Marks & lines menu
2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
LINES STYLE
- - - -
Lines style window
3. Use the Trackball to select line style desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. The
line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For
example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the CLEAR key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the CLEAR key. Placing the
cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the C: START soft key or the ENTER knob.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-26
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase
marks and lines from.
6. Press the C: END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete
the marks/lines selected. Press the ENTER knob to delete.
7. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP, B: TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and C: ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the A: EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
3.8 Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a
starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information
your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a
waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page 1-11 for details), by
cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual input of latitude and
longitude).
3.8.1 Entering waypoints
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint. This new
waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
soft keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the D: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-27
NEW
WPT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
002WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
COMMENT
02:36 01JAN01
LAT
34° 12. 134'N
LON
134° 12. 345'W
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
MARK
001WPT
NAME
SELECT
MARK
A
RETURNE
COORD
TYPE
B
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
C
SAVED
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the D: SAVE soft key to
register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.
6. Press the A: SELECT MARK soft key.
7. Press the A: MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the Trackball to select shape desired.
9. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
10. Press the A: SELECT MARK and B: MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the
waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the C:
ENTER soft key.
SELECT COLOR
RED
YELLOW
GREEN
LIGHT BLUE
PURPLE
BLUE
WHITE
Waypoint mark color selection window
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-28
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm
radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the
proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the
proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
Use the Trackball to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or PROXIMITY ALARM
RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your
boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on
in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph 3.11.6.)
Use the Trackball to select location.
Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the alphanumeric keys.
12. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint, or press the MENU key to close the menu.
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a
target found on a radar.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and D: WAYPOINT BY RNG &
BRG soft keys.
3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing.
Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing
from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.
Operate the Trackball to select location, then press the D: START POINT soft key.
4. Press the C: NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark
shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
002WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
003WPT
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
359.9°
0.00nm
COMMENT
02:36 01JAN01
LAT
34° 12. 134'N
LON
134° 12. 345'W
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
MARK
001WPT
NAME
SELECT
MARK
A
RETURNE
COORD
TYPE
B
N< - - >S
E< - - >W
C
SAVED
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Entering a
waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-26.
6. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the MENU key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-29
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press A: LOCAL LIST soft key (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest,
maximum 32 points) or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC
order) soft key.
Alphanumeric waypoint list
Local waypoint list
WPT
ALPHA
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
050.9°
RNG
1.98nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
065.9°
RNG
1.83nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
144.9°
RNG
4.93nm
WPT
LOCAL
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
050.9°
RNG
1.98nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
065.9°
RNG
1.83nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
144.9°
RNG
4.93nm
NEW
WPT
B
RETURNE
GOTOA
EDIT
WPT
C
ERASE
WPT
D
NEW
WPT
B
RETURNE
GOTOA
EDIT
WPT
C
ERASE
WPT
D
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the B: NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the
previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Editing a
waypoint from the plotter display” on page 3-30.
7. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to edit.
5. Press the C: EDIT WPT soft key.
6. Edit data as appropriate.
7. Press the D: SAVE soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-30
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS
soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window
appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following:
a) Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint. A
line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its position is
changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route,
you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the ENTER
knob to move the waypoint, or press the CLEAR key to cancel.
6. Press the MENU key to finish.
BRIDGE
WP-002
34° 22. 345'N 86.6°
M
TRIP NU
080° 22. 345'E
4.53nm 99.9 nm
Press to alternately display
range/bearing from own ship
to cursor, range/bearing from
original waypoint position to
cursor position.
Below is an example of the
range/bearing from original
waypoint position to cursor
position.
FISH
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
then push the ENTER knob.
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press D: EDIT/MOVE
and C: MOVE WPT soft keys.
16.0nm
+
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
34° 22. 3456'N FROM 5.3°M
080° 22. 3456'E
FISH 1.45 nm
+
CANCELE
RNG
BRG
C
Plotter display
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase. A flashing
diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly selected.
2. Press the CLEAR key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint
list.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-31
Erasing a waypoint from the menu
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS
soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the D: EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are
asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen
and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and A: WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to erase.
5. Press the D: ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
6. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the
plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD charts)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn
them off.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART DETAILS soft keys.
CHART
DETAILS
LAT/LON GRID GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION ON
WAYPOINTS LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES ON
CHART BORDER LINES ON
LANDMASS BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND BLACK
NAVAIDS ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO ON
OTHER SYMBOLS WHITE
MARK SIZE LARGE
RETURNE
CNTOUR
LINE
B
EDITA
Chart details menu
3. Use the Trackball to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-32
5. Use the Trackball to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation
are shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.8.5 Searching waypoints
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, A: WAYPOINTS and B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST
soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.
Search window
WPT
ALPHA
ABALONE
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG 350.9
°
RNG 3.80nm
CRAB
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
050.9°
RNG
1.98nm
FISH
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
065.9°
RNG
1.83nm
LOBSTER
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
00:00 01JAN01
BRG
144.9°
RNG
4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
NEW
WPT
B
RETURNE
GOTOA
EDIT
WPT
C
ERASE
WPT
D
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter up to three alphanumeric
characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the
screen.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-33
3.9 Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series
of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of
waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically
advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination
waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
3.9.1 Creating routes
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints. This function requires SAFE
ROUTE CHECK (C-MAP only).
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if
there are no routes entered.)
ROUTE
Route name
Total length of route
Number of waypoints
in route
001
WAYPOINTS
35
LENGTH
25.6 nm
002
WAYPOINTS
2
LENGTH
56.7 nm
003
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
004
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
NEW
ROUTE
B
RETURNE
GOTOA
EDIT
ROUTE
C
ERASE
ROUTE
D
1/20
Route menu
4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-34
NEW
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
COMMENT
0 0 1
LOCAL
LIST
B
CANCELE
PLOTA
ALPHA
LIST
C
CONECTD
New route entry screen
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name
may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST or C: ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint, then press the A: ADD WPT soft key to add it to
the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the C: ERASE LST WP soft key. Each
press of this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the D: SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing
waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the
youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WP soft key
appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the C: ADD WP soft key (or C: ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to register the route.
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically
by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous
track.
The “SAVE” icon (SAVE) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is
being created.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-35
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the D: CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
001
WAYPOINTS
35
LENGTH
25.6 nm
002
WAYPOINTS
2
LENGTH
56.7 nm
003
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
004
WAYPOINTS
3
LENGTH
21.1 nm
SAVE
ROUTE
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
RETURNE
NEWA
SELECT
ROUTE
B
1/20
Save route menu
4. Press the A: NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select
the route with the Trackball, then press the D: SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the
A: NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.
SAVE
ROUTE
Next consecutive route number
ROUTE NAME
0 0 6
COMMENT
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
CANCELE
MANUALC
BCKTRK
DIST
B
BCKTRK
TIME
A
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by
pressing A: BCKTRK TIME, B: BCKTRK RANGE or C: MANUAL soft key as appropriate.
For manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST one of the following
displays appears.
00h01m
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)
00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
TIMEINTERVAL DISTANCEINTERVAL
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-36
7. Enter interval desired with the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys. Press the A:
START LOG and E: RETURN soft keys followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
At this moment, a voyage-based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own ship position. A
new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the
route. (At this time you may close the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the E:
RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below.
When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already
registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case,
automatically creating voyage-based route stops.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and D: CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the A: FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.2 Connecting routes
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Press the B: NEW ROUTE soft key.
5. If desired enter route name and comment.
6. Press the D: CONECT soft key.
7. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter the route name for the first route,
beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
NEW
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
COMMENT
0 0 1
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST
SECOND
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
FORWARD FORWARD
CANCELE
F < -- > RA
SAVED
Connect route window
8. Press the A: F
<− −>R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route,
forward or reverse.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-37
001
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
001WPT
002
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
002WPT
003
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
003WPT
004
34°34.490'N
135°51.387'W
004WPT
LOCAL LIST
Waypoint list for editing a
route
(
local list
)
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the D: SAVE soft key.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an
error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total
number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints
Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
6. Press the B: LOCAL LIST soft key.
EDIT
ROUTE
90.0°
2.86nm
322.6°
3.08nm
75.2°
4.99nm
152.5°
19.87nm
LEG
ROUTE NAME:
001
COMMENT:
01
48°18.290'N
123°14.286'W
007WPT
02
48°17.341'N
123°10.232'W
005WPT
03
48°20.261'N
123°11.658'W
003WPT
04
48°19.862'N
123°04.190'W
006WPT
COORD
TYPE
D
RETURNE
INSERT
WPT
A
REMOVE
WPT
B
CHANGE
WPT
C
Edit route menu
7. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the location
where you want to insert a waypoint.
8. Press the A: INSERT WPT or C: CHANGE WPT soft
key as appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.
9. Use the Trackball to select the waypoint you want to
insert. (You can switch between the local list and
alphanumeric list by using the C: LOCAL LIST and D:
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the A: SELECT WPT or A: CHANGE WPT soft
key, whichever is displayed.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-38
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A
flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
8. Press the C: ADD TO START soft key or the C: ADD TO END soft key depending on
the waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: ADD WPT soft
key appears) or new location (C: ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the C: ADD WPT soft key (C: ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a
route.”
2. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The C: SPLIT
LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.
3. Press the C: SPLIT LEG soft key.
4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the C:
INSERT WPT soft key replaces the C: INSERT NEW WP soft key.
5. Press the C: INSERT WPT soft key (C: INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE and B: LOCAL LIST soft keys.
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.
7. Press the B: REMOVE WPT soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the C: EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the A: PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-39
7. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from the
route.
8. Press the D: REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint
removed.
9. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.9.5 Erasing routes
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select a route.
5. Press the D: ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to erase the route, or the CLEAR key to escape.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points, waypoints,
port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data
sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data
indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to 35 points)
or 35PTS/FIND. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports,
port services” on page 3-41.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the Trackball to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
GOTO METHOD
~
1 POINT
{
35 POINTS
{
35PTS/PORT SVC*
*For C-map: "FIND"
Go to method window
4. Use the Trackball to select a method.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-40
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (D: GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (D: GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the D: GOTO CURSOR or D:
GOTO WPT soft key.
A solid blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked
as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line
shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow
to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the
top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on
the previous page.
2. Press the D: GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (C: SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (C: ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the C: SELECT WPT or C: ADD QP soft
key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase
last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the D: ERASE LST QP (D: ERASE LST WP)
soft key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all
other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show
the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential
order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route,
under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints
Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the Trackball to select a waypoint.
2. Press the D: GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the A: WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
4. Press the A: LOCAL LIST or B: ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
5. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-41
6. Press the A: GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint
selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to
the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
Selecting an external waypoint
You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected with NMEA
cable. This function requires RMB sentence.
1. Press the MENU key, B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER SETUP
menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select QP.
3. Press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to show the QP window.
QP
{ EXT WPT (RMB)
~ INTERNAL
QP window
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar screen, a lollipop
appears to show the waypoint.)
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavChart
TM
only)
A port service list which shows services is available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-13.)
You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on page 3-39.
This procedure is necessary for NEAR SERVICE function.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the ENTER knob to show the
OBJECT INFORMATION window.
3. Press the A: FIND soft key to show the FIND window.
4. Operate the trackball to choose PORT LIST or PORT SERVICE, and then press the
ENTER knob or C: ENTER soft key to show the list.
5. Operate the trackball to choose the port (service), and then press the ENTER knob and
A: GOTO PORT soft key in order.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-42
SELECT SERVICE
SELECT PORTS
Port services (NavChart )
Port list (NavChart , Italy)
TM
TM
FUEL
WATER
OTHER UTILITIES
REPAIR
GENERAL
FIRST AID
OTHER INFO
POSITION
xx xx.xxx'N
xxx xx.xxx'W
BRG. & RNG.
xxxT x.xxxnm
GENERAL SERVICE
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
AGNONE S. NICOLA
AGROPOLI
AMALFI
BAIA
CAPRI
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
Port services and sample port list
6. If you selected PORT (Navionics GOLD chart only) at step 4, use the Trackball to select
a port, then press the A: GOTO soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the
ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply press the C: ADD QP soft
key followed by the ENTER knob.)
If you selected SERVICE at step 4, select service mark desired with the Trackball and
then push the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. Then, the display shows the
locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below shows the location of filling
stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the Trackball to place the “hand cursor” on
the port service icon desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key. Make a route using the
soft keys, then push the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected,
simply press the C: ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the ENTER knob.)
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2°M
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
I. ISCHIA
CASAMICCIOLA
ISCHIA
PORTO
40°45.971'N
13°57.462'E
+
GOTO
16.0nm
CANCEL
GOTO
E
ENTERC
Sample filling station locations (southern Italy)
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-43
3.10.4 Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the B: ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the A: GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint
nearest own ship.
WPT002
WPT001
FISH
CRAB
GOTO
ROUTE
16.0 nm
359.2°M 104.5°M TRIP
83.2nm10.0kt
FISH
0.7
RETURNE
GOTO
WPT
C
RVRSE
ROUTE
D
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the Trackball to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from where
to start navigating the route.
7. Press the C: GOTO WPT or C: FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken
at step
A solid light-blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines
connect all other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the
route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order
Press the D: RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the ENTER knob to navigate waypoints
in reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-44
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended
course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original
course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these
cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.
Original course
Obstacle
Line 1
Line 2
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
Passed waypoint (gray characters)
TO Waypoint (WPT name in reverse video)
LOG
ETA 23:59 30. APR
02
90.0°
2.86nm
322.6°
3.08nm
75.2°
4.99nm
152.5°
19.87nm
LEG
01
48°18.290'N
123°14.286'W
007WPT
48°17.341'N
123°10.232'W
005WPT
03
48°20.261'N
123°11.658'W
003WPT
04
48°19.862'N
123°04.190'W
006WPT
02
Replaces triangle
when selecting a
route leg.
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG"
when selecting
a route leg.
STOPB
RE-
START
A
SPEEDD
COORD
TYPE
E
RVRSEC
Log display
4. Use the Trackball to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected the
single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the A: RESTART soft key or A: FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
RESTART: Line 2 in the figure shown above
FOLLOW LEG: Line 1 in the figure shown above
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-45
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
4. Press the D: SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
SPD 010.0kt
GPS AVG. SPEED
Select speed for ETA window
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by
selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the
three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes
passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination
waypoint or the boat comes within the arrival alarm range.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes
within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2
Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the A: RESTART
soft key (see page 3-44). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the
GOTO method (see page 3-40).
WPT 1
Perpendicular
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Waypoint switched
at this point.
Arrival Alarm Circle
WPT2
WPT2
Automatic waypoint switching methods
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-46
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the trackball to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
5. Use the trackball to select appropriate waypoint switching method; PERPENDICULAR,
ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the C: WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the C: LOG soft key.
4. Press the B: STOP soft key.
5. Push the ENTER knob.
6. Press the B: RELEASE soft key.
7. Push the ENTER knob.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-47
3.11 Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms:
arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed
alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water
temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on
the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
ALARM2
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
ALARM1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
Page 2Page 1
PREV.
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM OFF 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM OFF
XTE ALARM OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM OFF
TRIP ALARM OFF 0000.0nm
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
BOTTOM ALARM OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
GROUNDING ALARM OFF*
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
G ALRM
REPORT*
* C-MAP specification only
G ALRM
REPORT*
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can
enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the ALARM key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns on or off the audio alarm
globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-48
3.11.2 Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The
area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of
the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is
active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and
anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.
: Alarm area
Own ship
Alarm
range
Destination
waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
ON 0.010nm
OFF
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available arrival
alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-49
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest.
When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the
anchor watch area.
Your ship's position where
you start the anchor watch
alarm.
Alarm
setting
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
ON 0.010nm
OFF
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available
anchor watch setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it
on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-50
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the XTE alarm is
active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.
: Alarm
Destination
waypoint
Own ship
position
Alarm
setting
Intended
course
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
EDIT XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE alarm window
4. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The available XTE
alarm setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3.11.5 Speed alarm
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or
under/over the speed range set.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select SPEED ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm
window.
4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or
OFF as appropriate.
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the Trackball and the
alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
SPEED ALARM
WITHIN
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
UNDER/OVER
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
OFF
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-51
PROXIMITY ALARM
ON
OFF
Proximity alarm window
TRIP ALARM
ON 0000.0nm
OFF
Trip alarm window
3.11.6 Proximity alarm
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the
proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list.
When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The
proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm
window.
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate,
then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3.11.7 Trip alarm
The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Trackball to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
4. Select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter
alarm setting: Operate the Trackball to select digit; use
the alphanumeric keys to enter value.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to
register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-52
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)
The grounding alarm feature continuously scans the electronic chart data in front of the boat
to detect charted rocks, shoals, obstructions and land areas that could pose a threat if the
vessel were to continue along its current course. The area searched is user-definable and is
identified by a red triangle on the screen.
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Choose GROUNDING ALARM from page 2 of the ALARM menu.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the grounding alarm window.
GROUNDING ALARM
ON 0.500nm
OFF
Grounding alarm window
4. Select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter alarm setting: Operate the
Trackball to select digit; use the alphanumeric keys to enter value. The setting range is
0.001-1.000 nm (0.0001-2.000 km), in increments of 0.001 nm (km)
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
7. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-53
3.11.9 Alarm information
When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
and is red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been
violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm
information window.
ALARM1
Alarminformation
window
Speaker icon
XXX = Destination waypoint name
AUDIOALARM INTERNALBUZZ
ARRIVALALARM ON0.010nm
ANCHORWATCHALARM OFF0.010nm
PROXIMITYALARM OFF
XTEALARM OFF0.050nm
SPEEDALARM OFF
TRIPALARM OFF0000.0nm
ALARMINFORMATION
ARRIVED
ATWAYPOINTXXX!
NEXT
PAGE
D
RETURNE
EDITA
CLEAR
ALARM
C
Plotter alarm menu, page 1
2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer
if it was not done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red
to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is
eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the
message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this
case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to finish.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background
color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not
change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-54
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Message Meaning
ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX! (XXX = waypoint name) Arrival alarm violated.
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA! Proximity alarm violated.
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT! Anchor watch alarm violated.
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT! XTE alarm violated.
SPEED ALARM! Speed alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED Trip alarm violated.
GROUNDING ALARM Grounding alarm (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (DEPTH AREA)
Depth area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (LAND AREA)
Land area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (INTERTIDAL AREA)
Intertidal area (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (ROCK)
Rock alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (SHORELINE CONSTRUCT)
Shoreline construct (C=MAP
specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (OBSTRUCTION)
Obstruction (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
GUARDIAN ALARM (NO DATA AVAILABLE)
No data alarm (C=MAP specification)
violated. See next paragraph.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-55
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to
zero as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and A: GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that
order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
GENERAL
SETUP1
AIS
OPTION
KEY BEEP ON
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°
F
DEPTH UNIT ft
WIND UNIT ft
WIND DATA APPARENT
SPEED AVERAGING 60 seconds
LOCAL TIME OFFSET 9H 0m
RESET TRIP LOG NO
TIMEOUT DISP. SETTING 15 seconds
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION
START UP PICTURE DEFAULT
NEXT
PAGE
D
RETURNE
EDITA
B
General setup menu, page 1
Note: B: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
3. Use the Trackball to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3-56
This page intentionally left blank.
4-1
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N you can show video
sounder images on the display.
4.1 Sounder Displays
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency,
marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and A-scope.
To select a display;
1. Press the DISP key and then select sounder display desired.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the D: DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
DUAL FREQ
SINGLE FREQ
MARKER ZOOM
BOTTOM ZOOM
BOTTOM LOCK
BOTTOM DSCRM
HF: 200.0 kHz
LF: 50.0 kHz
Display mode window
4. Use the Trackball
or the ENTER knob to select a display.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the E: RETURN soft key you may use it or the ENTER knob
to register setting and close the window.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-2
0.0
LF
HF
Dual-frequency display
4.1.2 Description of sounder displays
Single-frequency display
Color bar
Soft keys
Variable Range Marker
(White)
Depth scale
Tx frequency
Depth
50
30
Temp.
scale
Water
temp.
graph
Water
temp.
display
50.0
°F
Minute marker
Icons (alarm,
battery,
simulation)
Bottom echo
Zero line
Fish
echo
LF
40
0
50
100
150
200
120
SOUNDER
SINGLE
Display mode
SOUNDER DUAL
SOUNDER SINGLE
SOUNDER M. ZOOM
SOUNDER B. ZOOM
SOUNDER B/L
SOUNDER B/D
Cross-hair
cursor
0'30"
Time
S
I
M
SHIFTA
DISPLY
MODE
D
AUTO/
D.BOX
B
C
FREQ
LF /
HF
E
SPLIT
/
Indications on the single frequency display
Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It
can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the SOUNDER MENU.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF (high
frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key.
“LF” or “HF” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both
LF and HF pictures. This display is useful
for comparing the same picture with two
different sounding frequencies.
LF picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to
detect bottom conditions. The lower the
frequency of the pulse, the wider the
detection area. Therefore, the low
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-3
HF picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore, the
high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
low frequency
high frequency
Sounding area and transmission frequency
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full
vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by
operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the ENTER knob.
The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is
equal to one division of the depth scale.
Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.
HF
80
42.0
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
Fish school
Fish
school
This part
is zoomed.
Zoom marker
VRM
NORMAL
DISPLAY
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
60
70
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0'20"
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-4
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range
selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 7.9.3), and is useful for
determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is
a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
HF
20.0
Bottom
NORMAL DISPLAY
Zoom marker
BOTTOM-ZOOM
DISPLAY
80
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0
10
20
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the
screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded
onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the
bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu. For details, see paragraph 7.9.3.
HF
80
This part
is zoomed.
Fish
school
Zoom marker
NORMAL DISPLAYBOTTOM-LOCK
DISPLAY
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
8
6
4
2
0
10
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-5
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom
hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
20.0
NORMAL DISPLAYBOTTOM
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
HF
0
80
2
4
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
50
-
Zoom marker
Long tail = Hard bottom
Short tail = Soft bottom
Bottom tail
Bottom discrimination display
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with
amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is
useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display,
press the D: DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A:
A-SCPE soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the
screen must be split horizontally to show the A-scope display.
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
HF
50
0
100
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
84
Strong echo (bottom)
A-scope display
Weak echo (fish)
No response
-
-
A-scope display
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-6
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the E: SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
LF
HF
0.0
LF
HF
E
SPLIT
/
E
SPLIT
/
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do
not have the time to adjust the display.
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and
clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:
The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen.
The range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way
point of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the
lower edge of the scale.
The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown (default
color arrangement).
Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING. CRUISING
is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools. CRUISING uses a
higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish
detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-7
4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
CRUISING
FISHING
OFF (MANUAL)
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the Trackball or the ENTER knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.
The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the
depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a
“window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired
depth.
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the B: AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
4.3.2 Selecting display range
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters,
fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the
automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 8 Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7
ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft 4500 ft
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m 1500 m
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa 900 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B 900 P/B
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-8
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen.
Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
Press the GAIN key to show the gain window, and adjust the ENTER knob or Trackball.
Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%). Press the E: RETURN
soft key to finish.
GAIN - LF
57
HIGH
LOW
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF and HF.
Use the C: FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you
attempt to do so.
4.3.4 Shifting the range
The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the A: SHIFT soft key
followed by adjusting the ENTER knob. Press the E: RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-9
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward,
clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the Trackball to shift the VRM.
2. Roll the Trackball horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
VRM (white)
40.0
Depth to VRM
Cross-hair
cursor
LF
97
150
200
50
100
0
0'33"
Time for a scan line to travel
from the right edge of the
display to the cross-hair cursor
How to measure depth and time
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth
scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely.
Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4.5 Reducing Interference
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment
on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from Electrical inteference
other sounder
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-10
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter
window.
NOISE LIMITER
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
Noise limiter window
4. Use the Trackball
to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH),
or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be
missed.
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise
Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the
water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER
menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low
level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
09
Clutter window
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-11
4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0
(OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note
that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes. Therefore, turn off the clutter when
its use is not required.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors. However, if you
do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level
instead.
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes
Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green
or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the A: EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
SL5
SL6
SIGNAL LEVEL
OFF
SL1
SL2
SL3
16-color display
8-color display
Signal level window
4. Use the Trackball to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the
number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to
reduce colors, use clutter instead.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-12
4.8 White Marker
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you
may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the A: EDIT soft key to open the white marker
window.
WHITE MARKER
OFF
White marker window
4. Use the Trackball
to select the color to display in white. As you use the Trackball, the
number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar
shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.
White marker shows
color currently
displayed in white.
Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4.9 Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the
screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed
will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed
will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the A: EDIT soft key to open the picture
advance window.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-13
PICTURE ADVANCE
2/1
1/1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/16
STOP
Picture advance window
4. Use the Trackball
to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the
number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line
is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for
observing an echo.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder
picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display
range is being changed.
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be set
according to ship’s speed, the ship’s speed dependent mode. As shown in the figure below
the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced by the change of ship’s speed, thus the
speed-dependent picture advance permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at
any speed. The choice “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode,
where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed.
FULL
SPEED
HALF
SPEED
ActualMovement
Samesize
fishschools
Speed
NormalMode
Speed-DependentPictureAdvanceMode
Fishschoolshrinksasspeed
isincreased;expanded
asspeedisdecreased.
Fishschoolsareshown
samesizeregardless
ofship'sspeed.
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-14
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1. Press the MENU key followed by the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
2. Select PRR LEVEL.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
4. Use the Trackball
to select SPD SENSING PRR.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for
smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data
through the network.
4.10 Display Colors
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
1
Hue window
4. Use the Trackball
to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see the
result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No. Echo Color Background Color
1 16 color Blue
2 8 color Blue
3 16 color Dark blue
4 8 color Dark blue
5 16 color White
6 8 color White
7 16 color Black
8 8 color Black
9 Monochrome yellow, eight intensities
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-15
4.11 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom
alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm
(temperature sensor required).
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
SOUNDER
ALARM
AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
FISH ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
RETURNE
EDITA
CLEAR
ALARM
C
Sounder alarm menu
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable
the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball
to select ALARM AUDIO.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
INTERNAL BUZZ
OFF
Alarm audio window
4. Use the Trackball
to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select “INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF
globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-16
4.11.2 Bottom alarm
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set. To activate
the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or
off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball
to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range with
the Trackball and numeric keys: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.3 Fish alarm
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the
sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball
to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
Fish alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and
numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit the appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-17
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance
from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER
SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball
to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
OFF
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the Trackball
to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Trackball and
numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric
key to enter value.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE.
The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and
the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the
range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.
1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the Trackball
to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the A: EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
WITHIN RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
OUT OF RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
OFF
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the Trackball to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric key
to enter alarm range: Adjust the Trackball to select digit; hit appropriate numeric key to
enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the A: +< - ->- soft
key.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-18
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
in red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the
alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated:
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
SOUNDER
ALARM
Alarm information
window
Speaker icon
AUDIO ALARM INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM 0050.0-0100.0ft
TEMPERATURE ALARM OFF
FISH ALARM OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L) OFF
ALARM INFORMATION
DEPTH ALARM!
RETURNE
EDITA
CLEAR
ALARM
C
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the C: CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer
if it has not already been done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason
for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been
violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information
window. In this case, press the B: NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have
been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the CLEAR key or C: CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The
color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.
3. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
DEPTH ALARM! Bottom alarm violated.
FISH ALARM! Fish alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-19
4.12 Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the
sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be turned on or off as below.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used. When in
shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface and actual bottom
echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s
speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed (required
speed input.) For further information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page
4-13.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the A: SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PRR LEVEL.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
5. Use the Trackball
to select the rate for repetition.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a problem to
search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear on the display.
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card
You may save the current sounder picture to an SD card, using a function key programmed
to save the sounder picture.
1. Program a function key in order to save the sounder picture. See paragraph 7.9.4 for the
procedure.
2. Hit the SHOW/HIDE key to show the function keys if they are not currently shown.
3. Press the function key programmed to save the sounder picture.
The sounder picture stops advancing and the message “NOW SAVING SOUNDER
PICTURE TO CARD” appears on the display while the picture is being saved. If no card is
inserted, the message “PLEASE INSERT THE CARD. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.”
appears. If there is not sufficient memory remaining in the card the message “THERE IS
NO MEMORY TO SAVE PICTURE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. After the
picture has been recorded, normal sounder operation is restored.
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-20
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display
4.15.1 Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s
position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4.15.2 Bottom echo
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but
the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity,
etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a
third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first
echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or
more in shallow depths.
The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom
materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show
only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return.
The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference
in water depth
Second bottom
echo
Rock base
Mud and sand
Bottom echoes
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-21
4.15.3 Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually
the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is
much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from
the density of the display.
Size of
fish school
Small
school
Large
school
Fish school echoes
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near
the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall,
the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a
water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer
different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish.
200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles
obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses
movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However,
reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs
frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4-22
This page intentionally left blank.
5-1
5.
This chapter intentionally left blank.
5. CHAPTER
5-2
This page intentionally left blank.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards,
and receiving and outputting data through the network.
6.1 Memory Card Operations
The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, position, water
temperature and setting data (plotter only). The following memory cards may be used:
Kingstone: SD-M64B1 (64 MB), SD-M128B1 (128 MB)
Viking: 32SD-M32B1 (32 MB), 64SD-M64B1 (64 MB)
EP Memory: 32 MB, 64 MB
SANDISK: 64SDSDB-64-J60 (64 MB), 128SDSDB-128-J60 (128 MB)
Panasonic: 64 RP-SD064BL1A (64 MB), 128RP-SD128BL1A (128 MB)
Toshiba: 64 SD-NAD064MT (64 MB), 128 SD-NA128MT (128 MB)
6.1.1 Deleting all data (other than chart data) from memory cards
Follow the procedure below to delete all data (other than chart data) from memory cards.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA
TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys
to show the SAVE DATA menu.
SAVE
DATA
TRACKS OFF
MARKS & LINES OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF
SETTING DATA* OFF
* = Plotter data only
SAVEB
RETURNE
EDITA
DELETED
Save data menu
3. Press the D: DELETE soft key. You are asked if you are ready to delete the contents of
the memory card.
4. Push the ENTER knob to format (or press the CLEAR key to escape). “NOW
DELETING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card while its contents are
being deleted. When the formatting is completed, “DELETE COMPLETED. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.
5. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-2
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO DELETE
MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, D: DATA
TRANSFER, A: SAVE/LOAD DATA and C: SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys
to show the SAVE DATA menu.
3. Use the Trackball to select item to save.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Use the Trackball to select ON.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the B: SAVE soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “NOW SAVING
DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL
COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These
are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message Reason Remedy
Memory card is not
inserted. Please insert
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card not
inserted.
Push the ENTER knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Overwrite data?
(Track)
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
Data type to be
recorded exists on
memory card. (Two or
more of same type of
data cannot be
recorded.)
Push the ENTER knob to overwrite same
data type on the card, or press the CLEAR
key to escape.
Failed to save data. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Could not save data. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-3
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card
Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory
card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting
up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and D: DATA
TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the A: SAVE/LOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the A: LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD DATA menu.
LOAD
DATA
TRACKS OFF
MARKS&LINES OFF
WAYPOINTS&ROUTES OFF
SETTINGDATA* OFF
WALLPAPER OFF
*=Plotterdataonly
LOADB
RETURNE
EDITA
Load data menu
4. Use the Trackball to select item to load.
5. Press the A: EDIT soft key. (The A: EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card
is inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)
6. Use the Trackball to select ON. (Select OFF not to load selected data.) Press the C:
ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps
and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the B: LOAD soft key, then press the ENTER
knob. The message “START LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE. appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when
the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory
becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card
contents could not be loaded, push the ENTER knob to restart with default settings. Note
that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the
power off and on again.
Wallpaper: Load desired wallpaper. (See Chapter 7.)
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-4
6.2 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the D: DATA TRANSFER soft key.
4. Press the C: RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
RECEIVE
DATA
HOST NAME PLOT1 - - -
MARKS & LINES OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES OFF
RCVB
RETURNE
EDITA
Receive data menu
5. Select HOST NAME, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
1 (NAVNET1)
2 (NAVNET2)
3 (NAVNET3)
4 (NAVNET4)
Host name window
6. Use the Trackball to choose host name from which to receive data, then push the
ENTER knob.
7. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the A: EDIT soft key. For example, select
MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
ON
OFF
Marks & lines window
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
10. Press the B: RCV soft key followed by the ENTER knob. The message “START
RECEIVING DATA VIA NETWORK.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the
message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears. When the transfer is completed,
the message “DATA TRANSFER COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.
appears. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
11. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-5
6.3 Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network. To prevent trouble, do not
output the same data from multiple sources.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, A: PORT SETUP and
D: OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT
SNTNC
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RETURNE
ON/OFFA
Select sentence menu
3. Select sentence with the Trackball.
4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm
APB: Autopilot sentence B
BOD: Bearing origin to destination
BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line
DPT: Depth
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL: Geographic position - latutude/longitude
GTD: Own ship information-TD
MTW: Water temperature
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
VHW: Water speed and heading
VTG: Course over ground and ground speed
WPL: Waypoint location
XTE: Cross-track error, measured
ZDA: Time and date
HDT: Heading true,
HDG: Heading, deviation and variation
MWV: Wind speed and angle
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-6
This page intentionally left blank.
7-1
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your
needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select
the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.
7.1 General Setup
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display
from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data
sources, etc.
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key.
GENERAL
SETUP1
GENERAL
SETUP2
Page 1
Page 2
KEY BEEP ON
LANGUAGE ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°
F
DEPTH UNIT ft
WIND UNIT ft
WIND DATA APPARENT
SPEED AVERAGING 60 seconds
LOCAL TIME OFFSET 9H 0m
RESET TRIP LOG NO
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING 15 sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION SAVE SHIP
POSITION & MOB
WALLPAPER DEFAULT
LAT/LON DISPLAY DD˚MM.MMMM'
TD DISPLAY LORAN C
SPEED SOG
POSITION DISPLAY LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY 24 HOURS
RANGE & BEARING MODE RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT MAGNETIC
MAGNETIC VARIATION AUTO 07.0
°
E
EDITA
RETURNE
NEXT
PAGE
D
AIS
OPTION
B
EDITA
PREV.
PAGE
E
General setup menu
Note: B: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
4. Press the D: NEXT PAGE or E: PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.
5. Use the Trackball to select item.
6. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
7. Use the Trackball to select option desired, then press the C: ENTER soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-2
Contents of general setup menu
Item Description Settings
Key Beep Turns key beep on/off. On, Off
Language Chooses menu language. English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian
Range Unit Chooses unit of range and speed
measurement.
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm &
m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm & yd, mph
Temperature
Unit
Chooses unit of water temperature
measurement.
°C,°F
Depth Unit Chooses unit of depth measurement. m, ft, fa, P/B (Passi/Braza)
Wind Unit Chooses unit of wind measurement. Kt, km/h, MPH, m/s
Wind Data Chooses how to display wind data. Apparent: The wind felt aboard a moving
vessel. It is the combination of the true wind
and the boat wind. True: The true speed and
direction of the wind, not modified by the
effects of the boat's movement.
Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average
ship’s speed over a given period. If the
period is too long or too short,
calculation error will result. Change this
setting if calculation error occurs. The
default setting is suitable for most
conditions.
0-9999 seconds
Local Time
Offset
Enter time difference between local
time and UTC time to use local time.
-13:30 to +13:30
Reset Trip Log
Resets trip log. Yes, No
Timeout
Display
Setting
Sets number of seconds to show a
window (for example, BRILL, GAIN)
before it is erased from the screen.
15 s, 30 s, 60 s, Continue (no timeout)
Save MOB
Key Function
Defines the function of the SAVE/MOB
key.
Save Ship Position & MOB: Short press to
save ship position, long press to save MOB.
MOB Without Confirmation: Position saved
as MOB position without confirmation. This
setting is only effective with automatic range
selection and with waypoint marker displayed
on radar display.
Quick Point Function: Position saved as
quick point.
Wallpaper Chooses what to display in menu
background.
Requirements for user wallpaper
Size: 252 KB or less, 640(H)x480(V)
Name: wallpaperh.png
No. of Colors: 256
Compression Level: None
Interlace: None
Permeation Color: None
Default: Default wallpaper
User: User wallpaper. To use your own
wallpaper, save Microsoft Photo Editor or
Adobe Photoshop created png image (see
conditions at left) to SD card, load file to
equipment (see Chapter 6) and then choose
this User option.
Lat/Lon
Display
Chooses how many digits (or seconds)
to display after decimal point in latitude
and longitude position.
DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,
DD°MM.MMMM’, DD°MM’SS.S”
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-3
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings
TD Display Chooses type of TD to display.
Loran C, Decca
Speed Chooses speed format to display. SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed
through water)
Position
Display
Chooses how to display position.
Examples of MGRS indications:
18S: Locating a point within the Grid
Zone Designation
18SUU: Locating a point within a
100,000-meter square
18SUU80: Locating a point within a
10,000-meter square
18SUU8401: Locating a point within a
1,000-meter square
18SUU836014: Locating a point within
a 100-meter square
Latitude, Longitude; Loran or
Decca TDs, or MGRS
(Military Grid Reference
System).
What is MGRS?
For convenience, the world is generally
divided into 6° by 8° geographic areas,
each of which is given a unique
identification, called the Grid Zone
Designation. These areas are covered by
a pattern of 100,000-meter squares.
Each square is identified by two letters
called tie 100,000-meter square
identification. This identification is unique
within the area covered by the Grid Zone
Designation. Exceptions to this general
rule have been made in the post to
preserve the 100,000-meter
identifications on mapping that already
exists.
A reference keyed to a gridded map of
any scale is made by giving the 100,000-
meter square identification together with
the numerical location. Numerical
references within the 100,000-mater
square are given to the desired accuracy
in terms of the easting (E) and northing
(N) grid coordinates for the point. The
Grid Zone Designation usually is prefixed
to the identification when references are
made in more than one grid zone
designation area.
Time Display Chooses time notation.
12 hours, 24 hours
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-4
Contents of general setup menu (cont from previous page)
Item Description Settings
Range &
Bearing
Mode
Chooses how to calculate range and
bearing.
Great Circle: Shortest course between
two points on the surface of the earth.
Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn
between two points on a nautical chart.
Bearing
Readout
Chooses bearing display format for
course, course over ground and cursor
bearing.
True, Magnetic
Magnetic
Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of
the earth are preprogrammed into this
unit. The preprogrammed variation is
accurate for most instances, however
you may wish to manually enter a
variation. For manual input, select
Manual, hit the A: EDIT soft key, enter
value, then hit the C: ENTER soft key to
set. “AUTO” requires position data.
Auto, Manual
7.2 Radar Setup
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your operational needs.
7.2.1 Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains
items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
DISPLAY
SETUP
EBL REFERENCE RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING AUTO
TX SECTOR BLANKING OFF 000
°
001
°
NOISE REJECTION OFF
BACKGROUND COLOR BLACK/GREEN
ECHO COLOR GREEN
2ND ECHO REJECTION OFF
WATCHMAN TIME 5 minutes
RANGE UNIT nm
TRAIL MODE RELATIVE
D. BOXB
RETURNE
EDITA
Radar display setup menu
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-5
Contents of radar display setup menu
Item Description Settings
EBL
Reference
References EBL bearing, shown in the
EBL data box, to North (True) or
heading (Relative). Relative with no
heading input. True only in course-up,
north-up and true motion.
True, Relative
Cursor
Position
Chooses how to display cursor position.
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires
heading data, true bearing. Reverts to
relative bearing when heading data is
lost.
LAT/LON:
Lat/Long position of cursor
TD:
Loran C or Decca TDs
RNG & BRG-REL:
Range and bearing
in relative bearing.
RNG & BRG-TRUE:
Range and
bearing in true bearing.
MGRS:
MGRS format position
Tuning Selects receiver tuning method. For
further details see the paragraph “2.3
Tuning.”
Auto, Manual
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which
shows area where no echoes are
received. To set sector, select ON, then
enter range. Max. sector is 135°.
Dashed lines mark the dead sector.
Note that noise may occasionally
appear in the TX sector when the echo
trail feature is turned on.
TX Sector
Blanking
Dead sector
On, Off
Noise
Rejection
Electrical noise, appearing on the
screen as “speckles,” may be
suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference
cannot be suppressed.
Off, Low, High
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-6
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings
Background
Color
Chooses colors of background,
range rings and characters.
Effective when C: HUE soft key is
set for MANUAL SET.
Black/Green
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Echo Color
Chooses echo color.
Yellow, Green,
Multi-color. (Multi-color shows echoes
in red, yellow or green in order of
descending strength.)
2ND Echo
Rejection
Reduces second-trace echoes. See
the paragraph “2.24 Suppressing
Second-trace Echoes.”
On, Off
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period.
For further details see the
paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”
5, 10, 20 minutes
Range Unit Select unit of range measurement. nm, km, sm
Trail Mode
Sets echo trail reference.
Note: Relative trail is available in all
presentation modes except true
motion. True trail is available in all
modes.
True: Echo trails plotted in actual
courses and speeds. Requires
compass signal and speed input.
Relative: Echo trails move relative to
own ship.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-7
7.2.2 Radar range setup
You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the RANGE key to activate range
settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.
At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you
cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
Note that this function is not available with the GD-1920C-BB.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
2. Press the B: RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE SETUP
menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE
SETUP
Range unit: nm
Range unit: km
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
0.125nm
0.25nm
0.5nm
0.75nm
1nm
1.5nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
6nm
8nm
12nm
16nm
24nm
36nm
48nm
64nm
72nm
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm*
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0.25km
0.5km
0.75km
1km
1.5km
2km
3km
4km
6km
8km
12km
16km
24km
36km
48km
64km
72km
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm *
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
RETURNE
ON/OFFA
RETURNE
ON/OFFA
Radar range setup menu
3. Use the Trackball to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
4. Press the A: ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key to register settings.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Model Maximum Range
1824C-BB 24 nm, km, sm
1834C-BB 36 nm, km, sm
1934C-BB 48 nm, km, sm
1944C-BB 64 nm, km, sm
1954C-BB 72 nm, km, sm
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-8
7.2.3 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label
1 Turn heading line off. HL
2 Turn range rings on/off. RNG
3 Turn echo trail on/off. TRL
4 Turn display offcenter on/off. OFC
5 STBY/TX TX
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
Function key
setting
Function
key label
H
L
R
N
G
T
R
L
O
F
C
T
X
SOFT KEY 1
HL: HDG LINE OFF
SOFTKEY 2
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRIAL
SOFT KEY 4
OFC: OFFCENTER
SOFT KEY 5
TX: STBY/TX
RETURNE
EDITA
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
SOFT KEY 1
OFC: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
SOFT KEY 1
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
RSR: SOURCE RADAR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
Scroll
down
Scroll
down
T
T
S
S
Radar function key options
4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-9
Radar function keys
Menu Item Function
Function Key
Label
OFF Assigns no function.
HL: HDG LINE OFF Turns heading line off. HL
MOD: MODE Selects presentation mode. MOD
GAI: GAIN Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window. GAI
SEA: A/C SEA Shows A/C SEA adjustment window. SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window. RAI
FTC: FTC
Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700
series radar. Inoperative otherwise.
FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH Turns echo stretch on/off. ES
PLS: PULSE LENGTH Sets pulselength (long or short). PLS
ZOM: ZOOM Turns zoom on/off. ZOM
OFC: OFFCENTER
Press to shift display center to cursor location.
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to
display center.
OFC
TRL: ECHO TRAIL Starts/stops echo trails. TRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF Turns range rings on/off. RNG
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to
navigator.
TLL
ALM: GUARD ALARM Displays alarm soft keys. ALM
EBL: EBL
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with
each press.
EBL
VRM: VRM
Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with
each press.
VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display
on/off.
TTM
WMK: WPT ON/OFF Turns waypoint marker on/off. WMK
WTM: WATCHMAN Turns watchman on/off. WTM
ACQ: ACQUISITION
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series
network radar.)
ACQ
TX: STBY/TX Toggles between standby and transmit TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE Selects source for radar picture. RSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes display control in combination display. CHG
QP: QUICK POINT Sets quick point (for navigation). QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key
number.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-10
7.3 Plotter Setup
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.
7.3.1 Navigation options
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the
PLOTTER SETUP menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key open the main menu.
2. Press the B: PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
PLOTTER
SETUP
WAYPOINT SWITCHING ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR LINE
SET GOTO METHOD 1 POINT
QP INTERNAL
SAFE ROUTE CHECK OFF
D. BOXB
RETURNE
EDITA
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu
Item Description Settings
Waypoint
Switching
Chooses waypoint switching method. See
“switching waypoints” on page 3-45.
Perpendicular, Arrvl Alm
Crcl, Manual
Course
Vector
You may extend a line from the own ship position to
show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length
depends on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course
bar).
Line, Vector, Off
Set GOTO
Method
Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick
point. See “3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.”
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port Service
QP
Set “EXT WPT (RMB)” when a destination waypoint
is displayed from a external navigation equipment.
EXT WPT (RMB),
Internal
Safe Route
Check
(C-MAP only)
The safe route check feature checks for interfering
objects (such as wrecks) within a route when
creating or editing a route.
On, Off
B: D. BOX
(soft key)
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 7.5.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-11
7.3.2 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
Default Function
Function Key Label
1 Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track. TRK
2 Edit mark/line. EML
3 Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points). RUL
4 Add new waypoint. ADD
5 Alphanumeric waypoint list. ALP
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
Function key
setting
Function
key label
T
R
K
E
M
L
R
U
L
A
D
D
A
L
P
SOFT KEY 1
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
SOFT KEY 5
ALP: ALPHA LIST
RETURNE
EDITA
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key. A menu shows
the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP: QUICK POINT
Scroll
Plotter function key options
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-12
4. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
5. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
Plotter function keys
Menu Item Function
Function Key
Label
OFF Assigns no function.
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor
for waypoint location, then press function key.
ADD
MWP: MOVE WPT
Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select waypoint, press function key, select new
position, then press the ENTER knob.
MWP
RUL: RULER
Measures range and bearing between two points.
Press D: START POINT soft key to change starting
point if necessary. Range and bearing between two
points appears at the top of the screen.
RUL
GWP: GOTO WPT
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
waypoint name in window, then press the C:
ENTER soft key.
GWP
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window,
then press the C: ENTER soft key.
GRT
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft
key to access menu item.
EML
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own
ship’s track.
TRK
TTM: TTM ON/OFF Turns TTM (target track) display on/off. TTM
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK Erases all TTM track. DTT
ALP: ALPHA LIST Displays waypoint alphanumeric list. ALP
LCL: LOCAL LIST Displays waypoint local list. LCL
RTE: ROUTE LIST Displays route list. RTE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Shows/hides data boxes. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes control in combination screen. CHG
QP: QUICK POINT Sets quick point (for navigation). QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key
number.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-13
7.4 Chart Setup
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to
turning chart attributes on or off.
7.4.1 Chart offset
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the
ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this
error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key followed by the A: CHART SETUP
and A: CHART OFFSET soft keys.
+
BRIDGE
FISH
WP-002
34° 22. 3456'N 353.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E
0.75nm 9.9 nm
CHART
OFFSET
+
16.0nm
RESET
OFFSET
D
RETURNE
SET
OFFSET
C
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the Trackball to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of
own ship.
3. Press the C: SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” (
) appears at the top of
the display.
To cancel chart offset, press the D: RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-14
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD
chart attributes
Navionics GOLD chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu,
which you may display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and A: CHART DETAILS soft keys.
CHART
DETAILS
CHART
DETAILS
Page 1 Page 2
E
RETURN
EDIT
A
E
EDIT
A
LAT/LON GRID GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION ON
WAYPOINTS LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES ON
CHART BORDER LINES ON
LANDMASS* BRT YELLOW
NAVAIDS ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO ON
OTHER SYMBOLS* WHITE
* No use.
OBJECT INFORMATION ALL ON
CHART DISPLAY DETAILED
NAVAIDS SYMBOL
INTERNATIONAL
CAUTION & ROUTING DATAON
MARINE FEATURES ON
LAND FEATURES ON
CNTOUR
LINE
B
D
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
Chart details menu (Navionics
)
Contents of chart details menu (Navionics)
Item Description Settings
Lat/Lon Grid Latitude and longitude grids Red, yellow, green, light-blue,
purple, blue, white, Off
Text Information Geographic place, name On, Off
Waypoints Waypoint size Large, Small, Off
Waypoint Names Waypoint name On, Off
Chart Border Lines Border lines (indices) On, Off
Navaids Navaids data On, Off
Light Sector Info Lighthouse viewing sector On, Off
Object Information Map data Off, All On (display area data for
cursor-selected object), Points
On (display only point data for
cursor-selected object)
Chart Display Choose level of detail for map Detailed, Simple
Navaids Symbol Choose what kind of navaids
symbols to display.
International, US
Caution & Routing
Data
Turn caution and routing data on
or off.
On, Off
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-15
Contents of chart details menu (Navionics GOLD) (cont from previous page)
Item Description Settings
Marine Features Turn marine features on or off. On, Off
Land Features Turn land features on or off. On, Off
CONTOUR LINE Soft key
Spot Soundings Turn water depth display on or off. On, Off
Safety Contour Paint areas in dark blue (default
color) which are shallower than
depth value set.
2m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
5 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
10 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
20 m or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
Depth Contour Display depth contours. ALL: Display all depth contours
5 m: Display only 5 m* depth
contours
10 m: Display only 10 m* depth
contours.
20 m: Display only 20 m* depth
contours
OFF: Turn off depth contours.
* Or equivalent ft, fa or PB.
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes
Displaying the CHART DETAILS menu
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS
menu:
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART DETAILS soft keys.
CHART
DETAILS
CHART
DETAILS
Page 2
Page 1
SEABED TYPE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PORTS & SERVICES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
TRACKS & ROUTES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
UNDERWATER OBJECTS PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RIVERS & LAKES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NATURAL FEATURES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CULTURAL FEATURES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LANDMARKS PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LAT/LON GRID PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART BOUNDARIES
AUTO
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
MIXING OFF
CHART LEVEL UNLOCK
PERSPECTIVE ON
DE-CLUTTER ON
CHART DISPLAY MODE FULL
SAFETY STATUS PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT NAME PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAMES PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOYS NAME PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAV-AIDS US
LIGHT SECTORS FLASHING
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
ATTENTION AREAS PLOTTER/OVERLAY
TIDES & CURRENTS PLOTTER/OVERLAY
EDIT
A
B
DEPTH
INFO
D
NEXT
PAGE
E
RETURN
EDIT
A
B
DEPTH
INFO
D
PREV
PAGE
Chart details menu (C-MAP)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-16
CHART DETAILS menu description
CHART DETAILS menu description
Object Content Settings Description
ON Turns perspective display on. PERSPECTIVE Perspective
display on/off
OFF Turns perspective display off.
ON Removes overlapping objects from
display.
DE-CLUTTER Overlapping
object on/off
OFF Displays overlapping objects.
FULL All chart attributes are displayed.
SIMPLE Some attributes such as SEABED
TYPE, TRACKS and ROUTES are
displayed.
FISHING Setting for use in fishing.
LOW Only NAV AIDS and water depth are
shown.
CHART
DISPLAY MODE
Choose chart
display mode
CUSTOM User chooses which chart attributes to
turn on or off.
ON Safety status ON (See Safety Status
Indication on page 7-18 for
description.)
SAFETY
STATUS*
1
Safety status
indication
OFF Safety status OFF
PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
WAYPOINT Waypoints marks
and waypoint
names
OFF Waypoint markers and waypoint
names are turned off. Waypoint
names are not displayed regardless if
WAYPOINT NAME (below) is set to
ON.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
WAYPOINT
NAME
Waypoint names
OFF Waypoint names are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
NAMES Text for land and
sea areas
OFF Names are turned off.
PLOTTEROVERL
AY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
BUOYS NAME Name of buoys
OFF Buoy names are turned off.
US NOAA symbols are shown.
US SIMPLE Complex object shown with single
icon.
INT International symbols are shown.
INT SIMPLE Complex object shown with single
icon.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
NAV-AIDS Lighthouses,
buoys, etc.
OFF Navaids are turned off.
ON Light sectors displayed. LIGHT
SECTORS
Light sector
FLASHING Light sectors displayed and flashing.
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-17
CHART DETAILS menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object Content Setting Description
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
ATTENTION
AREAS
Attention areas
OFF Attention areas are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
TIDES &
CURRENTS
Tidal station and
current station
OFF Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
SEABED TYPE Seabed type
OFF Tidal station and current station are
not shown. Tidal graph is also turned
off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
PORTS &
SERVICES
Ports and
services
OFF Ports and services are not shown.
Near Service also not shown.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
TRACKS &
ROUTES
Tracks and routes
OFF Tracks and routes are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
UNDERWATER
OBJECTS
Below-surface
obstructions such
as wrecks
OFF Underwater objects are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
RIVERS &
LAKES
Rivers and lakes
OFF Rivers and lakes are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
NATURAL
FEATURES*
2
Natural features
OFF Natural features are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
CULTURAL
FEATURES*
3
Cultural features
OFF Cultural features are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
LANDMARKS*
4
Landmarks
OFF Landmarks are turned off.
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
LAT/LON GRID Latitude and
longitude grids
OFF Latitude and longitude grids are
turned off.
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-18
CHART DETAILS menu description (con’t from previous page)
Object Content Setting Description
ON Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
AUTO Chart border lines are shown for the
last four charts in a chart card on the
plotter and overlay displays
PLOTTER/OVER
LAY
Chart border lines show on plotter and
overlay displays.
PLOT Chart border lines show on plotter
display.
CHART
BOUNDARIES
Chart boundary
lines
OFF Chart boundaries are turned off.
ON Mixing is active. MIXING Changes chart
scale to fit whole
chart on display
OFF Mixing is disabled.
LOCK Keeps current chart scale. CHART LEVEL Maintains current
chart scale
regardless of
zoom setting
UNLOCK Chart scale may chosen freely.
*
1
SAFETY STATUS INDICATION
The following indications are shown beneath the range indication to denote safety
status:
NORMAL BEST MAP DATA OFF DE-CLUTTER DANGER
ZOOM indications:
NORMAL: Chart is displayed at compilation scale.
U.ZOOM: Red when chart is under-zoomed more than twice compilation scale, gray
otherwise.
O.ZOOM: Red when chart is over-zoomed more than twice compilation scale, gray
otherwise.
CHART LOC: Red when chart is zoomed more than twice compilation scale, gray
otherwise.
BEST MAP: Red when a more detailed chart is beneath cursor position.
DATA OFF: Red when the below-mentioned objects or a layer within a layer is not
displayed by the user. Objects: DEPTH/SOUNDINGS, WRECKS/OBSTRUCTIONS,
TRACKS/ROUTES, ATTENTION AREAS, NAVAIDS
DE-CLUTTER: Appears when the de-clutter function is active.
DANGERS: Red when grounding alarm is violated.
CAUTIONS: Red if vessel enters prohibited area when grounding alarm is active.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-19
*
2
NATURAL FEATURES: Any topographic features formed by the action of natural
process.
*
3
CULTURAL FEATURES: Any man made topographic feature; built-up areas, roads.
*
4
LANDMARK: Any prominent objects such as monument, building, silo, tower etc. on land
which can be used in determining a location or a direction.)
B: DEPTH INFO soft key
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the A: CHART SETUP and C: CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the A: DEPTH INFO soft key.
DEPTH
INFO
DEPTH AREA PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT
00002, 00009, 00018 m
DEPTH LINE & SOUNDINGS
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS LIMIT
0000, 0305 m
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT
0000, 0009 m
E
RETURN
EDIT
A
DEPTH INFO menu
DEPTH INFO menu description
DEPTH AREAS: Choose the display where to fill in color the depths selected at DEPTH
AREAS LIMIT.
Setting Description Default Setting
PLOT/OVERLAY
Turns on depth area display on
plotter and overlay displays.
PLOTTER
Turns on depth area display on
plotter display.
OFF
Turns off depth area display.
PLOTTER
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT: Choose the shallow, medium and deep depths to color according to
depth.
Setting Setting Range Default Setting
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-SHALLOW 2 m, 5 ft, 1 fa, 1 pb
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-MEDIUM 9 m, 30 ft, 5 fa, 6 pb
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT-DEEP
0-15000 m
0-49212 ft
0-8202 fa
0-9090 pb
18 m, 60 ft, 10 fa, 11 pb
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-20
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS: Choose where to display depth contours, depth data, etc.
Setting Description Default Setting
PLOT/OVERLAY Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter and
overlay displays.
PLOTTER Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter display.
OFF Turns off depth lines and soundings.
PLOT/OVERLAY
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS LIMIT: Chooses the depth range at which to show depth
lines and soundings (depth contours, depth data, etc.)
Setting Setting Range Default Setting
DEPTH LINES AND SOUNDINGS LIMIT-SHALLOW 0 m, 0 ft, 0 fa, 0 pb
DEPTH LINES AND SOUNDINGS LIMIT-DEEP
0-15000 m
0-49212 ft
0-8202 fa
0-9090 pb
305 m, 1000 ft, 167 fa,
185 pb
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT: Chooses range for rocks depth display.
Setting Setting Range Default Setting
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT-SHALLOW 0 m, 0 ft, 0 fa, 0 pb
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT-DEEP
0-304 m
0-999 ft
0-166 fa
0-184 pb
9 m, 30 ft, 5 fa, 6 pb
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-21
7.5 Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size
data box.
1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.
Plotter mode: B: PLOTTER SETUP, B: D. BOX
Radar mode: A: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, B: D. BOX
Sounder mode: A: SOUNDER MENU, B: D. BOX
DATA
BOX
DATA BOX SIZE SMALL
POSITION ON
WAYPOINT OFF
COG ON
SOG ON
STW OFF
BEARING OFF
RANGE OFF
TIME TO GO OFF
ETA OFF
TEMPERATURE OFF
DEPTH OFF
TRIP LOG ON
DATE OFF
TIME OFF
WIND OFF
RETURNE
EDITA
Data box menu
4. Use the Trackball to select an item, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection. Six items
may be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-22
7.6 Hot Page Setup
Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the
default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.
1. Press the MENU key followed by pressing the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C:
SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and A: HOT PAGE SETUP soft
keys in that order.
2. Use the Trackball to select the hot page number to set, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
The “SELECT SCREEN TYPE” window appears.
HOTPAGE
SETUP
HOT PAGE 1
HOT PAGE 2
HOT PAGE 3 3
HOT PAGE 4 4
HOT PAGE 5 5
HOT PAGE 6
SELECT SCREEN TYPE
FULL SCREEN
SPLIT x 2
SPLIT x 3
CANCELE
ENTERC
Hot page setup menu
3. Use the Trackball to select screen type desired among FULL SCREEN, SPLIT X 2 and
SPLIT X 3 and push the ENTER knob.
4. For the full-screen display, rotate the ENTER knob to select screen desired, then press
the ENTER knob. If you selected a split screen, for example, SPLIT X 3, the display now
looks as in the figure below.
HOT PAGE 1
Red cursor shows
current screen selection
RADAR PLOTTER
SOUNDER
NAV DATA
OVERLAY
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, main screen selection
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-23
5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a main screen, then press the ENTER knob. For
example, select the radar display. Your choice is then shaded to show that is has been
selected.
Sub screen
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR
PLOTTER
SOUNDER
COMPASS HIGHWAY EXTVIDEO
Hot page setup menu, SPLIT X 3 screen, sub screen selection
6. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the top right 1/4 screen, then
press the ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the screen to show at the bottom right 1/4 screen,
then press ENTER knob or the C: ENTER soft key.
Note: The A: SELECT WINDOW soft key functions to select the window to process.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7.7 Navigator Setup
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator
connected to your plotter.
7.7.1 Navigation data source
The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the
source of nav data. For GPS receiver other than
the GP-310B/320B, speed averaging and local
time offset (to use local time) are also available.
Press the MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and A: NAV
SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to display this
menu.
POSITION SOURCE ALL
SPEED SOURCE ETR
TEMPERATURE SOURCE ETR
DE`PTH SOURCE ETR
STW CALIBRATION 0%
TEMP CALIBRATION +0.0
°
F
DEPTH CALIBRATION +0.0ft
WIND AVERAGING 5 minutes
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET P0.0
°
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION 00
°
F
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-24
Contents of nav setup menu
Item Description Settings
Position
Source
Chooses source of position data.
Note: When FURUNO BB GPS is selected,
GGA, VTG and ZDA sentences are set to
ON automatically.
FURUNO BB GPS: GPS Receiver
GP-310B/320B
GP: GPS navigator (via NETWORK
or NMEA port)
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid connection (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
Speed
Source
Chooses source of speed data ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Temperature
Source
Chooses source of water temperature data. ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show
water temperature data fed from the
network sounder.
Depth
Source
Chooses source of depth data. ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
STW
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA speed data. Enter amount
in percentage.
-50 to +50%
Temp
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA temperature data. Enter
offset to correct NMEA temperature data.
-40.0°C to +40.0°C (or equivalent
in °F)
Depth
Calibration
Calibrates NMEA depth data. Enter offset to
correct NMEA depth data.
-15.0 to +60.0 m (or equivalent in ft,
fa or P/B)
Wind
Averaging
Enter a value to smooth wind speed/direction
data. Ship’s bow is referenced to smooth
wind vector movement.
1-600 s
Wind
Direction
Offset
Offsets wind direction data. S180°-P180°
Wind Speed
Calibration
Offsets NMEA wind speed data. Enter
amount in percentage.
-50 to +50%
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-25
7.7.2 GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. Press the
MENU key followed by the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION
and B: GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
GPS
SETUP
GEODETIC DATUM WGS-84
POSITION SMOOTHING 000 second (s)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING 005 second (s)
LATITUDE OFFSET 0.000'N
LONGITUDE OFFSET 0.000'E
DISABLE SATELLITE - - - - - -
LATITUDE 45
°
35.000'N
LONGITUDE 125
°
00.000'W
ANTENNA HEIGHT 005 m
GPS FIX MODE 2D/3D
COLD START NO
Appears only when
GPS-320B is connected.
RETURNE
GPS
STATUS
B
EDITA
WAAS
SET UP
C
GPS setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu
Item Description Settings
Geodetic Datum
Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic
survey measurements consisting of fixed
latitude, longitude and azimuth values
associated with a defined station of
reference. You must have the correct
geodetic datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on
the chart for a given latitude and longitude.
Although WGS-84 is now the world
standard, other categories of charts still
exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of
geodetic datum.
See Appendix for full list.
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-26
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item Description Settings
Position Smoothing
When the DOP or receiving condition is
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change
greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.
This change can be reduced by smoothing
the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000
to 999 is available. The higher the setting
the more smoothed the raw data. If the
setting is too high, the response time
required to show a change of latitude and
longitude will be too long. This is
especially noticeable if the vessel is
moving fast. Increase the setting if the
GPS fix changes randomly.
0-999 seconds
Spd/Cse Smoothing During position fixing, ship’s velocity
(speed and course) is directly measured
by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw
velocity data may vary too much
depending on receiving conditions and
other factors. You can reduce this random
variance by increasing the smoothing. The
higher the smoothing setting, the more the
raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course
changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter
all zeroes.
0-999 seconds
Latitude, Longitude
Offset
Offsets latitude position to further refine
position accuracy.
0.001’S – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’W
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-27
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)
Item Description Settings
Disable Satellite
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting
abnormal satellite number(s) in its
Almanac, which contains general orbital
data about all GPS satellites, including
those which are malfunctioning. Using this
information, the GPS receiver
automatically eliminates any
malfunctioning satellite from the GPS
satellite schedule. However, the Almanac
sometimes may not contain this
information. If you hear about a
malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter
satellite number (two digits, max. 3
satellites),then press the C: ENTER soft
key.
Max. 3 satellites
Latitude
Sets initial latitude position after cold start.
Use the A: N < - -> S soft key to switch
coordinate.
Longitude
Sets initial longitude position after cold
start. Use the A: W < - -> E soft key to
switch coordinate.
Antenna Height
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit
above sea surface. For further details refer
to the installation manual.
0-99 m
GPS Fix Mode
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four
satellites in view whichever is greater).
2D, 2D/3D
Cold Start
Clears the Almanac to receive the latest
Almanac.
No, Yes
B: GPS STATUS
(soft key)
Displays GPS satellite status display.
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or
GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV. For further details
see the chapter on Maintenance.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-28
WAAS SETUP
Press the C: WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna.
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu
Item Description Settings
WAAS MODE Select ON to use the WAAS mode. On, Off
WAAS SEARCH
WAAS satellite can be searched automatically
or manually. For manual search, enter
appropriate WAAS satellite number.
Auto, Manual
WAAS ALARM
When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible
alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS
positioning mode is available again or the alarm
is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
On, Off
CORRECTION
DATA SET
Selects the type of message for WAAS
correction. Use “02 (default setting)” until the
system becomes operational.
00 to 27, 99
7.7.3 TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position.
(Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and C: TD SETUP soft
keys to display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
SETUP
LORAN-C
GRI 9940 11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1 +000.0 µs
CORRECTION 2 +000.0 µs
DECCA
CHAIN 01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1 +00.00 lane
CORRECTION 2 +00.00 lane
RETURNE
EDITA
TD setup menu
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-29
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
U.S. WEST COAST
9940 11-27
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Adjust the Trackball
upward or downward to select GRI code.
3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
U.S. WEST COAST
11-279940
Loran C GRI & station pair window
4. Adjust the Trackball vertically to select station pair.
5. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select
(GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter
correction value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: +
< − −> - soft key
to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the
ENTER knob.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN, then press the A: EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
S BALTIC
01 R-G
Decca chain and station pair window
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-30
2. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to select Decca chain number.
3. Roll the Trackball rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
S BALTIC
R-G01
Decca chain and station pair window
5. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward
to select station pair (R: red, G: green and P:
purple).
6. Press the C: ENTER soft key to register your selection.
7. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select (CHAIN)
8.CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the A: EDIT soft key. Enter
correction value with the Trackball and alphanumeric keys. Use the A: +
< − −> - soft key
to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the C: ENTER soft key or push the
ENTER knob.
9. Press the E: RETURN soft key twice.
10. Press the A: GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the D: NEXT PAGE soft key.
11. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
12. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network
equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and B: NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1POSITION
2WPTPOS3SOG
4STW5COG
6BEARING7RANGE
8DEPTH9TEMP
RETURNE
EDITA
Nav data setup screen
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-31
3. Use the Trackball to select a location.
4. Press the A: EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
LOG TRIP
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
DISPLAY DATA
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register
your selection.
6. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
7.9 Sounder Setup
This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking. You can set
fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.
7.9.1 System setup
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
SYSTEM
SETUP 1
FISH ALARM LEVEL MEDIUM
TRANSMISSION ON
TVG - HF 3
TVG - LF 3
ECHO OFFSET - HF +00
ECHO OFFSET - LF +00
BOTTOM LEVEL - HF +000
BOTTOM LEVEL - LF +000
KP PULSE INTERNAL
SMOOTHING SM3
TLL OUTPUT ON
SYSTEM
SETUP 2
STC - HF 00
STC - LF 00
FREQ. ADJ. - HF +00.0%
FREQ. ADJ. - LF +00.0%
TARGET ECHO NORMAL
Page 1
Page 2
(when connected ETR-30N only)
NEXT
PAGE
D
RETURNE
SENSOR
SETUP
B
EDITA
SENSOR
SETUP
B
EDITA
PREV.
PAGE
E
Sounder system setup menu
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-32
Sounder system setup menu description
Item Description Settings
Fish Alarm
Level
Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is,
the minimum echo strength which will
trigger the fish alarms.
High: Orange and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
Transmission Turns TX power on/off. On, Off
TVG
(HF,LF)
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates
for propagation attenuation of the
ultrasonic waves. It does this by
equalizing echo presentation so that
fish schools of the same size appear in
the same density in both shallow and
deep waters. In addition, it reduces
surface noise. Note that if the TVG
level is set too high short range
echoes may not be displayed.
0-9
Echo Offset
(HF, LF)
If the on-screen echo level appears to
be too weak or too strong and the
level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily
with the gain control, adjust echo
offset to compensate for too weak or
too strong echoes.
-50 - +50
Bottom Level
(HF, LF)
If the depth indication is unstable in
automatic operation or the bottom
echo cannot be displayed in
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain
control in manual operation, you may
adjust the bottom echo level detection
circuit, for both HF and LF, to stabilize
the indication. Note that if the level is
set too low weak echoes may be
missed and if set too high the depth
indication will not be displayed.
-100 - +100
KP Pulse
Selects source of keying pulse.
Internal, External (See installation
manual.)
Smoothing Smoothes echoes to present stable
display. The higher the setting the
greater the smoothing.
SM1-SM4, OFF
TLL Output Outputs current position to plotter
where it is marked with TLL mark. Use
soft key to output TLL.
ON, OFF
(Con’t on next page)
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-33
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page)
Item Description Settings
STC (HF, LF)
(For ETR-30N
only)
Adjusts STC level for the high and low
frequencies, and is useful for
suppressing surface noise. The
setting range is 0-10; the higher the
setting the greater the extent of
suppression. Setting 10 suppresses
noise up to several meters. Turn off
the STC when there is no noise on the
screen, otherwise weak echoes may
be missed.
0-10
FREQ. ADJ.
(HF, LF) (For
ETR-30N
only)
Interference from other acoustic
equipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat
may show itself on the display. You
may suppress these type of
interference by adjusting frequency.
-10 - +10 %
TARGET
ECHO
(For ETR-30N
only)
Sets fishing objective.
Normal for general fishing, Surface for
detecting surface. Pulse repetition
rate is higher than NORMAL on the
specified transducer.
Normal, Surface
B: SENSOR
SETUP
soft key
(See next
page.)
Offsets speed, depth and water
temperature indications and speed of
sound.
See next section for details.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-34
7.9.2 Sensor setup
The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth
data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the B: SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and B: SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show
the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and
speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.
SENSOR
SETUP
SPEED
12.3kt
DEPTH
125.0ft
TEMP
78.8
°
F
ACSTC SPD
1500m/s
SPEED CALIBRATION + 00%
TEMP. CALIBRATION + 00
°
F
DEPTH CALIBRATION +00ft
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION + 000m/s
RETURNE
EDITA
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Adjust the Trackball upward or downward to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the
water temperature readout is 77
°
F but the actual water temperature is 75
°
F, enter
–2(
°
F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s
draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus
or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder.
Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast
adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item Setting range (for default) Default Setting
Speed Calibration -50 -+50% 0 (no offset)
Temperature Calibration -40°F – +40°F 0 (no offset)
Depth Calibration -15 - +90 ft 0 (no offset)
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s 0 (no offset)
5. Press the E: RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-35
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker
and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever
the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before
changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the C: SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER RANGE
SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1 15 ft
RANGE 2 30 ft
RANGE 3 60 ft
RANGE 4 120 ft
RANGE 5 200 ft
RANGE 6 400 ft
RANGE 7 1000 ft
RANGE 8* 4000 ft
ZOOM RANGE 30 ft
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE 20 ft
RETURNE
EDITA
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
4. Rotate the Trackball or ENTER knob to set range desired, then press the E: RETURN
soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher
than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the MENU key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range 8 Range
1
Range
2
Range
3
Range
4
Range
5
Range
6
Range
7
ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m 1500 m
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft 4500 ft
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa 900 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B
100 P/B 200 P/B
700 P/B 900 P/B
Setting range (ETR-6/10N): 2 m –1200 m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 2 fa – 650 fa, 1 P/B – 1000 P/B
Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges
Item Settings Default Setting
Zoom Range 2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 70 P/B
10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B
Bottom-lock
Range
3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3
fa, 2 or 3 P/B
6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-36
7.9.4 Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label
1 Output current position. TLL
2 Suppress clutter. CLT
3 Erase weak signal. SLV
4 Suppress noise. NL
5 Set picture advancement speed. PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the MENU key.
3. Press the D: FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
KEY
Function key
setting
Function
key label
T
L
L
C
L
T
S
L
V
N
L
P
A
SOFTKEY1
TLL:TLLOUTPUT

SOFTKEY2
CLT:CLUTTER

SOFTKEY3
SLV:SIGNALLEVEL

SOFTKEY4
NL:NOISELIMITER

SOFTKEY5
PA:PICTUREADV 


RETURNE
EDITA
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the A: EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
GHF: GAIN - HF
GLF: GAIN - LF
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
SOFT KEY 1
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TVH: TVG - HF
TVL: TVG - LF
EOH: OFFSET - HF
EOL: OFFSET - LF
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SOFT KEY 1
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
SAV: SAVE SCREEN
QP: QUICK POINT
Scroll
down
Scroll
down
Sounder function key options
5. Select function desired with the Trackball, then press the C: ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-37
Sounder function keys
Menu Item Function
Function Key
Label
OFF Assigns no function.
MOD: AUTO MODE Display automatic mode selection window. MOD
GHF: GAIN – HF Displays high frequency gain adjustment window. GHF
GLF: GAIN – LF Displays low frequency gain adjustment window. GLF
SFT: SHIFT Shifts range in manual operation. SFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER Suppresses noise. NL
CLT: CLUTTER Suppresses clutter. CLT
WMK: WHITE MARKER Sets white marker. WMK
HUE: HUE Sets hue. HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL Erases weak signals. SLV
PA: PICTURE ADV Sets picture advance speed. PA
TG: TEMP. GRAPH Turns temperature graph on/off. TG
TVH: TVG – HF Sets TVG for high frequency TVH
TVL: TVG – LF Sets TVG for low frequency. TVL
EOH: OFFSET – HF Offsets echo strength for high frequency. EOH
EOL: OFFSET -LF Offsets echo strength for low frequency. EOL
SMT: SMOOTHING Sets echo smoothing rate. SMT
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE Sets zoom range. ZMR
BLR: B/L RANGE Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display. BLR
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes
line on sounder and registers position as a
waypoint on plotter.
TLL
SSR: SNDR SOURCE Selects source for sounder data. SSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Switches control in combination display. CHG
SAV: SAVE SCREEN Saves sounder picture to SD card. SAV
QP: QUICK POINT Sets quick point (for navigation). QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key
number.
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
7-38
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup
The nav graphic display (see paragraph 3.1.2) shows either the compass display or the
wind angle display, together with depth and temperature graphs. You may choose which to
display and setup the depth and temperature graphs as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, C: SYSTEM SETUP, C: HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and C: NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
GRAPHIC
EDIT
RETURN
GRAPHIC METER COMPASS
DEPTH GRAPH UP~DATE 1S/DOT
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE 1S/DOT
NAV GRAPHIC menu
3. Choose GRAPHIC METER and press the EDIT key.
GRAPHIC METER
COMPASS
WIND ANGLE
Graphic meter window
4. Choose COMPASS or WIND ANGLE as appropriate and press the C: ENTER soft key.
5. Choose DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE and press the A: EDIT soft key.
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE
0.5s./dot
1s/dot
2s/dot
4s/dot
Depth graph up-date window
6. Choose desired update period/number of dots and press the C: ENTER soft key.
7. Set TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE similarly.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
8-1
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order
and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
8.1 Preventive Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program
should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance program
Item Check point Remedy
Connectors of
processor unit and
control unit
Check for tight connection. Tighten loosened connectors.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection and
corrosion.
Clean or replace ground wire as
necessary.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-2
8.2 Replacement of Batteries
Battery on circuit board
A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board
inside the processor unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is
about three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon (
) appears at the top of the
display. When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
WARNING
Ensurebatterypolarityiscorrect.
Wrongpolaritymaycausethebatteriesto
explode.
8.3 Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the ship’s
mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before replacing it. Use the
correct fuse. Using the wrong fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.
1824C-BB, 1834C-BB: 7A for 12V device, 3A for 24V device
1934C-BB , 1944C-BB: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device
1954C-BB, GD-1920C-BB: 3A for 12/24 V device
1954C-BB’s Power Supply Unit PSU-005: 15A for 12V device, 7A for 24V device
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment or cause fire.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-3
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron
When the magnetron has expired, distant targets cannot be seen on the display. When you
feel that long range performance has decreased, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement of the magnetron.
Radar model and magnetron used
Model Magnetron Type Code No.
MODEL 1824C-BB E3588 000-146-866
MODEL 1834C-BB E3571 000-146-867
MODEL 1934C-BB MAF1421B 000-147-385
MODEL 1944C-BB MAF1422B 000-146-871
MODEL 1954C-BB MAF1425B 000-146-872
8.5 Replacing the Synchro Belt (1824C-BB only)
When the synchro belt of MODEL1824C-BB has worn out, the sweep is not synchronized
with antenna rotation, which results in an abnormal picture.
When you suspect that the synchro belt has worn out, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement. (Type: 40 S2M 266UG, Code No.: 000-808-743)
8.6 Trackball Maintenance
If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, you may need to clean the Trackball.
1. Turn the retainer ring counterclockwise 45° to unlock it.
2. Remove the retainer ring
and ball.
3. Clean the ball with a soft
lint-free cloth, and then
blow carefully into the
ball-cage to dislodge
dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers. If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton
swab moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retainer ring. Be sure the retainer ring is not inserted reversely.
Note: Trackball maintenance parts are available as below.
Part Type Code No.
Retainer ring and ball MU3721 000-144-645
Retainer Ring
PUSH TO ENTERPUSH TO ENTER
DEFDEF
MNOMNO
VWXVWX
_'#_'#
POWERPOWER
RANGERANGE
TXTX
00
JKLJKL
44
77
STUSTU
55
88
ABCABC
2211
BB
GAINGAIN
ALARMALARM
EBLEBL
VRMVRM
PQRPQR
YZ&YZ&
66
99
DISPDISP
EE
MENUMENU
CC
DD
CLEARCLEAR
GHIGHI
33
SAVESAVE
MOBMOB
HIDEHIDE
SHOWSHOW
AA
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-4
8.7 Simple Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
8.7.1 General
General troubleshooting
If… Then…
you cannot turn on the
power
check for blown fuse.
check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
check for damaged power cable.
check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response
when a key is pressed
turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may
be faulty. Request service.
8.7.2 Radar
GD-1920C-BB requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If… But… Then…
you pressed the POWER/TX
key and the C: RADAR TX
soft key to show the radar
picture
nothing appears on the
display
check that the antenna cable is
firmly fastened.
check if radar source is correct.
marks, legends appear no echo appears check that the antenna cable
is firmly fastened.
the picture is not updated or
it freezes
check antenna cable.
for freeze up, turn the
processor unit on and off
again.
tuning is adjusted sensitivity is poor magnetron may need to be
replaced. Contact your dealer.
the range is changed radar picture does not
change
try to hit the [+] and [-] keys
again.
turn the processor unit on and
off again.
there is poor discrimination in
range
adjust A/C SEA.
the true motion presentation
is not working properly
reselect true motion mode.
check if heading and speed are
input.
the range rings are not
displayed
hit the B: RADAR DISPLY and
C: RINGS soft keys to display
them.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-5
8.7.3 Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/GP-320B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If… Then…
position is not fixed
within three minutes
check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See
page 8-12.) There should be three or more.
position is wrong
check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS
SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
the track is not plotted
track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)
Press the B: TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL menu to start plotting again.
the bearing is wrong
check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs do not appear
check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the
GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca)
chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs are wrong
enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu.
the ship’s speed
indication is not zero
after the ship is
stopped
try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS menu.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-6
8.7.4 Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If… But… Then…
you selected a sounder
display with the DISP key
picture does not appear
check that the network
sounders signal cable is firmly
fastened.
Check that sounder source is
correct.
check that the network sounder
is plugged in. The LED on the
network sounder should flash
every second.
marks and characters
appear
picture does not appear
check for loosened transducer
connector.
the picture appears zero line does not appear
the picture is shifted. Confirm
shift setting.
picture sensitivity is too low
check gain setting, if using
manual operation.
marine life or air bubbles may
be clinging to transducer face.
bottom may be too soft to return
a suitable echo.
the depth indication is not
displayed
adjust gain and range to display
the bottom echo (in reddish
brown), if you are using the
manual sounder mode.
noise or interference shows
on the display
check to be sure the transducer
cable is not near ship’s engine.
check the ground.
other video sounders of the
same frequency as yours may
be operating near you.
the water temperature graph
appears
data is wrong
check that sensor cable is tightly
fastened.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-7
8.8 Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation.
Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test
pattern.
8.8.1 Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the processor unit, control unit, GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP, displaying
program number and checking for proper operation.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the A: MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model
18x4-BB/19x4-BB series network radar.
ARPTEST***
D
NETWORKSOUNDERTEST**
C
GPSSENSORTEST*
B
PROCESSORUNITTEST
A
RETURNE
MEMORY I/O TEST menu
7. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-8
Processor unit test
Press the A: PROCESSOR UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the processor unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices.
Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service.
A test connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is
connected. Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the E: RETURN soft key to
return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
XX.XX* = Program Version No.
XX.XX* = Program Version No.
Model 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB Series GD-1920C-BB
*=ForNAVIONICSmodel.
1950026
XX.XXforC-MAPmodel.
ProgramNo.1950025XX.XX*
ROM1 :OK
ROM2 :OK
SDRAM :OK
SRAM :OK
INT.BATTERY :OK
PORT
NMEAIN/OUT1 :--
NMEAIN/OUT2 :--
RCU :OK
HEADING :352.2
°
NETWORK :--
FPGANo. :
HEADINGPULSE :OK
BEARINGPULSE :OK(XX.Xrpm)
TOTALONTIME :000000.0h
TOTALTXTIME :000000.0h
MachineStatus+130
ProgramNo.1950025XX.XX*
ROM1 :OK
ROM2 :OK
SDRAM :OK
SRAM :OK
INT.BATTERY :OK
PORT
NMEAIN/OUT1 :--
NMEAIN/OUT2 :--
RCU :OK
HEADING :352.2
°
NETWORK :--
FPGANo. :
MachineStatus+130
Noresultsappearwhen
"sub"radarselectedas
radarsource.
Processor unit test results
GPS sensor test (Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B)
Press the B: GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version
number, and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as
the result. For NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY
I/O TEST menu.
*: This is for GPS-310B,
"48502380XX" appears for GPS-320B.
XX = Program Version No.
PROGRAM No. *48502180XX
GPS UNIT : OK
Machine Status +115
GPS receiver test results
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-9
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)
Press the C: NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment displays network sounder
program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature
(appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the ROM and RAM check are
shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN soft
key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM 1 : OK
RAM : OK
TEMPERATURE: 65.61°F
DEPTH : 100ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ETR-30N: 0252310XX.XX
Network sounder test results
ARP test (Requires ARP pcb in Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar)
The ARP test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the D: ARP TEST soft key
at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of the ROM and RAM check
are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the E: RETURN
soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
XX = Program Version No.
PROGRAM No. 18590271XX
ARP ROM : OK
ARP RAM : OK
SPEED : OK 12.3kt
COURSE : OK 359.9
°
TRIGGER : OK
VIDEO : OK
BP : OK
HP : OK
MIN-HIT : 0003
SCAN-TIME : 0250
MAN-ACQ : 00
AUTO ACQ : 00
FE-DATA1 : 000
FE-DATA2 : 000
Machine Status +115
ARP test results
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-10
8.8.2 Test pattern
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the C: TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
6. Push the ENTER knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors
individually.
7. Press the E: RETURN soft key.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
WHT
BLU
GRN
BLK
RED
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
[ENTER] knob
RETURN
GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
RED
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE PATTERN.
RETURNE
WHITE
Test pattern sequence
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-11
8.8.3 Keyboard test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the control unit for proper operation.
1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the B: KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PROGRAM No. 0359203-03.01
ROM :OK
ROM :OK
Screen for testing keyboard
6. Operate each control on the keyboard one by one. A key is functioning properly if its
on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For the ENTER knob and
Trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and push the ENTER knob
to confirm its function. Their ranges are –999 to +999.
7. Press the CLEAR key three times on the control unit to escape from the test.
8. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-12
8.9 GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with
connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the MENU key.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, B: NAV OPTION and B: GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the B: GPS STATUS soft key.
23:59:59
SEP 20 2003
Date
and
Time
DOP value
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite
signal levels. Satellites
whose signal level
extends past 40 are
used to fix position.
GPS antenna height
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
23
12
29
27
01
17
26
05
20
21
30
28
123
30
40 50
DOP
1.2
ALT
1 m
W
N
S
E
21
12
23
20
29
05
27
17
28
30
01
26
SAT
No.
SNR
GPS 3D
GPS position fix
W
WAAS satellite
(GP-320B only)
WAAS satellite
(in three digits, GP-320B only)
RETURNE
GPS status display
4. Press the E: RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-13
8.10 Clearing Memories
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These
memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared:
Radar: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication
(short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type,
on time, tx time, Sounder: White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration,
range.
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.
2. Press the E: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the C: SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the B: TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the D: MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
MEMORY
CLEAR
PROCESSORUNIT NO
GPSSENSOR NO
NETWORKSOUNDER NO
RETURNE
EDITA
Memory clear menu
6. Use the Trackball to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the A: EDIT soft key.
8. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the C: ENTER soft key. One of the
following displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
BEGIN COLD START
TO CLEAR GPS
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear GPS Receiver Clear Network Sounder Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the ENTER knob to clear the memory selected.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
11. Turn the power off and on again.
Note: The message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE CONTACT A
LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.”
may appear when powering on the display unit immediately after clearing any memory. It is
not an indication of malfunction. Press any key to continue operation.
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8-14
8.11 Error Messages
In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Error Message Meaning Remedy
General
Connection with the control
unit was cut
Control unit disconnected
Check the cable between
the processor unit and
control unit.
Connection with the ETR was
cut.
Network sounder disconnected.
Check that processor unit
where the sounder is
connected is turned on.
Check network sounders
cabling.
Connection with the RADAR
was cut.
Radar disconnected.
Check that processor unit
where the radar is
connected is turned on.
Check antenna cable.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
Voltage of battery on circuit
board in processor unit is low.
Have a qualified technician
replace the battery.
No bearing pulse detected.
No bearing pulse from radar
antenna.
Check antenna cable.
No position data.
GPS navigator is turned off or
no GPS position data.
There may be obstacles
around GPS antenna.
No GPS fix!
Possible trouble with
GP-310B/320B.
Disconnect GPS cable from
the processor unit, and then
contact your dealer.
No heading pulse detected. Check heading sensor.
HEADING DATA MISSING!
No heading pulse
Check heading cable.
A
P-1
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
Radar
MENU Key
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE, MGRS)
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000°, SECTOR 001°), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE, 
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)
2ND ECHO REJECTION (ON, OFF)
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
TRAIL MODE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
D. BOX soft key
(DATABOX SIZE SMALL/LARGE, POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW,
BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG,
DATE, TIME, WIND)
RADAR
DISPLAY
SETUP
ARP SETUP
0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/
6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (nm & sm)
0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (km)
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC
(Model 17X4C series radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE
LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF,
TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT
ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model
18X4C/19X4C series network radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR
SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
RADAR
RANGE
SETUP#
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
(Requires ARP
circuit board in
network radar
18X4C/19X4C.)
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX
1
# = Not used on GD-1920C.
Max. range
24 nm/sm, km = 1824C
36 nm/sm, km = 1834C
48 nm/sm, km = 1934C
64 nm/sm, km = 1944C
72 nm/sm, km = 1954C
APPENDIX
AP-2
GENERAL
SETUP
NAV
SOURCE
SETTINGS
NAV
OPTION
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
POSITION SOURCE
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SPEED SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
STW CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40 - +40 °F, 0 °F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
WIND AVERAGING (1 - 600 seconds, 1 seconds)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET (S(P)0 - 180 °, S0 °)
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50 %, 0 %)
Page 1
Page 2
1
2
GPS
SENSOR
SETTINGS
TD SETUP
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, OTHERS: See page A-10.)
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 0 seconds)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 5 seconds)
LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’N(S), 0.000’N)
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999’W(E), 0.000’E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE (45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (125°00.000’W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m, 5 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D)
COLD START (YES, NO)
LORAN-C GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
DECCA CHAIN (01: R-G (S Baltic))
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99-+99.99 lane, 00.00 lane)
GPS STATUS soft key
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
LANGUAGE
(ENGLISH, OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)
WIND UNIT (kt, km/h, MPH, m/s)
WIND DATA (APPARENT, TRUE)
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds, 60 seconds)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30 - +13:30, 0)
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING (15, 30, 60 seconds, CONTINUE)
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION (SAVE SHIP POSITION & MOB,
MOB WITHOUT CONFIRMATION, QUICK POINT FUNCTION)
WALLPAPER (DEFAULT, USER)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’
DD° MM’ SS.S")
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
SPEED (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD, MGRS)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL 07.0 °W)
WAAS SETUP soft key
(Only when GPS-320B is connected.)
WAAS MODE (ON, OFF)
WAAS SEARCH (AUTO, MANUAL 134)
WAAS ALARM (ON, OFF)
CORRECTIONS DATA SET (02)
APPENDIX
A
P-3
PORT
SETUP
2
4
SYSTEM
SETUP
3
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
GPS/NMEA
PORT
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK
(Select data sentences to output to NavNet
equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)
* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,
MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG, TTM
NMEA PORT
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
BAUD RATE
(AUTO, 4800 bps, 38400 bps)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM’
DD° MM. MMM’
DD° MM. MMMM’)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle
#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
CLEAR WINDOW
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key*
CLEAR WINDOW
(except in case of OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK)
APPENDIX
AP-4
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model 18X4/19X4 series network radar.
3
DATA
TRANSFER
SAVE/
LOAD
DATA
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA, WALLPAPER)
RECEIVE DATA
VIA NETWORK
HOST NAME (NAVNET1, 2, 3, 4)
MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF)
4
TEST &
CLEAR
MEMORY
I/O TEST
HOT PAGE
& NAV DISP
SETUP
HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 6.)
RADAR (BUILT IN DATA 1, BUILT IN DATA 2, USER DATA, LIVE)
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SOUNDER (BUILT IN DATA, ETR DATA, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt, 0 kt)
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9°, 000.0°)
LATITUDE (90°0.0’N-90°0.0’S, 45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’W)
START DATE & TIME (hh: mm dd. mmm. yy, 00:00 01 NOV. 04)
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)
TEST PATTERN
MEMORY
CLEAR
KEYBOARD TEST
DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)
GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**
PROCESSOR UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
SIMULATION
SETUP
NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP
GRAPHIC METER (COMPASS, WIND ANGLE)
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
APPENDIX
A
P-5
Plotter
MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
MARKS SHAPE ( )
LINES STYLE ( )
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
MENU Key
CHART OFFSET (Offsets chart position.)
TRACKS
& MARKS
CONTROL
CHART SETUP
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY (ON, OFF, ARP ONLY, AIS ONLY, BOTH)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (1 - 99m59s,10 seconds)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.1 nm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points, 2000 points)
TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)
LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,
BLUE, WHITE, OFF)
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LANDMASS*
NAVAIDS*
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
OTHER SYMBOLS*
OBJECT INFORMATION (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)
CHART DISPLAY (DETAILED, SIMPLE)
NAVAIDS SYMBOL (INTERNATIONAL, US)
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA (ON, OFF)
MARINE FEATURES (ON, OFF)
LAND FEATURES (ON, OFF)
CNTOUR LINE soft key
SPOT SOUNDINGS (ON, OFF)
SAFETY CONTOUR (7, 16, 33, 66 ft)
DEPTH CONTOUR (ALL, 16, 33, 66 ft, OFF)
1
2
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key
{
, , ,
= Default setting
CHART
DETAILS
(FURUNO,
NavCharts
TM
)
Page 1
Page 2
*: Not used.
APPENDIX
AP-6
PERSPECTIVE (ON, OFF)
DE-CLUTTER (ON, OFF)
CHART DISPLAY MODE (FULL, SIMPLE, FISHING, LOW, CUSTOM)
SAFETY STSTUS (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAMES
(
PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF
)
BUOYS NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAV-AIDS
(
US, US SIMPLE, INT, INT SIMPLE, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF
)
LIGHT SECTORS (ON, FLASHING, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
ATTENTION AREAS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TIDES & CURRENTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
SEABED TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
PORTS & SERVICES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TRACKS & ROUTE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
UNDERWATER OBJECTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
RIVERS & LAKES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NATURAL FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
CULTURAL FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LANDMARKS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
CHART BOUNDARIES (ON, AUTO, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
MIXING (ON, OFF)
CHART LEVEL (LOCK, UNLOCK)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)
CHART
DETAILS
(C-MAP
chart)
(See page
7-16.)
WAYPOINT SWITCHING
(PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GO TO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
PLOTTER
SETUP
Page 1
Page 2
1
2
D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
3
DEPTH INFO soft key
DEPTH AREAS
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY,
PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH AREAS LIMIT
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY,
PLOTTER, OFF
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS
LIMIT 
ROCKS DEPTH LIMIT
(Defaults are for CUSTOM mode.)
APPENDIX
A
P-7
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
CREATE
VOYAGE-
BASED
ROUTE
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,
ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
SELECT ROUTE
WAYPOINTS
ROUTES
WAYPOINTS/
ROUTES
LOCAL LIST
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
GO TO
NEW ROUTE
EDIT ROUTE
ERASE ROUTE
LOG
RESTART
STOP/RELEASE
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)
COORD TYPE
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
3
GO TO
NEW WPT
EDIT WPT
ERASE WPT
NEW WPT
NEW WPT
START POINT
Destination is
required.
APPENDIX
AP-8
Sounder
MENU Key
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)
CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
HUE (1-9, 1)
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6, 16 color)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR, 20)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page A-1.)
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW )
TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)
TVG-HF (0 - 9, 3)
TVG-LF (0 - 9, 3)
ECHO OFFSET-HF (-50 - +50, 0)
ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100, 0)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, 0 m/s)
SOUNDER
MENU
SOUNDER
SYSTEM
SETUP
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 50 ft; 1-60 fa, 10 fa; 1-70 P/B, 10 P/B)
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)
SOUNDER
RANGE
SETUP
SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN HF, GAIN LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,
WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG HF,
TVG LF, OFFSET HF, OFFSET LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE,
TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, SAVE
SCREEN, QUICK POINT)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP#
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-2.)
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7
Range 8
5 m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B
* = Default sounder ranges
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL;
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER; SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
1500 m
4500 ft
900 fa
900 P/B
APPENDIX
A
P-9
EXT VIDEO
(Same items as on page A-2.)
MENU Key SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
ALARM key
Plotter Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
GROUNDING ALARM*
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
ALARM key
*: C-MAP only
Sounder Alarms
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
ALARM key
APPENDIX
AP-10
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
002: WGS72
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012: AFG : Somalia
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value
016: : Botswana
017: : Lesotho
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
048: : Egypt
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
052: : Iran
053: : Italy Sardinia
054: : Italy Sicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
101: : Central America
102: : Cuba
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, Central America
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
116: OMAN : Oman
117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
118: : England
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
148: : Guyana
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
152: : Venezuela
153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
APPENDIX
A
P-11
Icons
Icon Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
S A
V E
Voyage-based route currently being created.
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about
replacement.
S
I
M
Simulation mode.
APPENDIX
AP-12
This page is intentionally left blank.
SP - 1
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR
MODEL 18x4C-BB/19x4C-BB SERIES
1 GENERAL
1.1 Range, Pulse length (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm) Pulse length (µs) PRR (Hz approx.)
0.125 to 1.5 0.08 2100
1.5 to 3 0.3 1200
3 to 72* 0.8 600
*Maximum Range: M1824C-BB: 24nm, M1834C-BB: 36nm, M1934C-BB: 48nm,
M1944C-BB: 64nm, M1954C-BB: 72nm
1.2 Range Resolution M1824C-BB: 15 m, Others: 18 m
1.3 Bearing Resolution M1824C-BB: 5.5°, M1833C: 4.0°, M1934C: 2.4°, M1944C: 1.9°,
M1954C-BB: 1.9° (XN12A), 1.2° (XN13A)
1.4 Minimum Range M1824C-BB: 27 m, Others: 33 m
1.5 Bearing Accuracy ±
1.6 Range Ring Accuracy 0.9 % of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
1.7 Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72
RI (nm) 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
Rings 2 2 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5
Maximum range:
M1824C
-BB
: 24nm, M1834C
-BB
: 36nm, M1934C
-BB
: 48nm, M1944C
-BB
: 64nm,
M1954C
-BB
: 72nm
2 ANTENNA UNIT
2.1 MODEL1824C-BB:
2.1.1 Radiator Micro-strip
2.1.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation 30/24 rpm nominal (for short/long range)
2.1.4 Radiator Length 46 cm
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 5.2°
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth 25°
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -19 dB or less (within ±20º of main-lobe)
-21 dB or less (±20º of main-lobe or more)
2.2 MODEL1834C-BB:
2.2.1 Radiator Printed waveguide array
2.2.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation 24 rpm nominal
2.2.4 Radiator Length 60 cm
SP - 2
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 3.9°
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth 20°
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -18 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-23 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.3 MODEL1934-BB:
2.3.1 Radiator Slotted waveguide array
2.3.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.3.3 Antenna Rotation 24 or 48 rpm nominal
High brilliance monitor: 24 rpm nominal only
2.3.4 Radiator Length 100 cm (XN10)
2.3.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 2.4°
2.3.6 Vertical Beamwidth 27°
2.3.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -20 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-28 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.4 MODEL1944C-BB:
2.4.1 Radiator Slotted waveguide array
2.4.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.4.3 Antenna Rotation 24 or 48 rpm nominal
High brilliance monitor: 24 rpm nominal only
2.4.4 Radiator Length 120 cm (XN12)
2.4.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9°
2.4.6 Vertical Beamwidth 22°
2.4.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
2.5 MODEL1954C-BB:
2.5.1 Radiator Slotted waveguide array
2.5.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.5.3 Antenna Rotation 24 or 48 rpm nominal
2.5.4 Radiator Length 120 cm (XN12), 180 cm (XN13, 24rpm only)
2.5.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 1.9° (XN12), 1.2° (XN13)
2.5.6 Vertical Beamwidth 22°
2.5.7 Sidelobe Attenuation
XN12: -24 dB or less (within ±20° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±20° of main-lobe or more)
XN13: -24 dB or less (within ±10° of main-lobe)
-30 dB or less (±10° of main-lobe or more)
SP - 3
3 TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1 Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
3.2 Peak Output Power M1824C-BB: 2.2 kW nominal,
M1834C-BB /1934C-BB: 4 kW nominal,
M1944C-BB: 6 kW nominal, M1954C: 12 kW nominal
3.3 Modulator FET Switching Method
3.4 Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5 Tuning Automatic or manual
3.6 Receiver Front End MIC (Microwave IC)
3.7 Bandwidth Tx pulselength 0.08 µs and 0.3 µs: 25 MHz
Tx pulselength 0.8 µs: 3 MHz
3.8 Duplexer Circulator with diode limiter
3.9 Warming up 90 to 180 s approx.
4 INTERFACE
4.1 Input Data IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
Own ship’s position: GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Ship’s speed: RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
Bearing (True): HDT>HDG
*1
>HDM
*1
>VHW
Bearing (Magnetic): HDM>HDG
*1
>HDT
*1
>VHW
Course: RMC>RMA>VTG
Water depth: DPT>DBT>DBS>DBK
Wind: MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature: MTW
Time: ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
4.2 Output Data
Alarm signal 12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5 GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW,
MTW, DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required),
TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)
5 PLOTTER FUNCTION
5.1 Projection Mercator
5.2 Usable Area 85 latitude or below
5.3 Effective Area 211.2 x 158.4 mm
5.4 Display pixels 640 x 480 dots
5.5 Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
SP - 4
5.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
5.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
5.8 Colors Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
5.9 Memory Capacity Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
5.10 Storage Capacity Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Rated Voltage/Current
M1824C-BB 12-24 VDC: 5.5-2.7 A
M1834C-BB 12-24 VDC: 5.3-2.6 A
M1934C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A
M1934C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 7.5-3.6 A
M1944C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 6.3-3.1 A
M1944C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 8.1-3.8 A
M1954C-BB (24rpm) 12-24 VDC: 8.6-4.3 A
M1954C-BB (48rpm) 12-24 VDC: 10.3-5.1 A
6.2 Rectifier (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient Temperature Antenna Unit: -25°C to +70°C
Processor Unit and Control Unit: -15°C to +55°C
Power Supply Unit: -15°C to +55°C
7.2 Relative Humidity 93 % or less at +40°C
7.3 Waterproofing Antenna Unit: IPX6
Control Unit: IPX5 (Front panel), IPX2 (Rear panel)
Processor Unit, Power Supply Unit: IPX0
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4
th
- 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%
(7 m/s
2
maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);
- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum
acceleration of 7 m/s
2
.
8 COATING COLOR
8.1 Display Unit N3.0
8.2 Antenna Unit
M1824C-BB/1834C-BB N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
M1934C-BB/1944C-BB/
1954C-BB N9.5
SP - 5
SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1920C-BB
1 PLOTTER FUNCTION
1.1 Projection Mercator
1.2 Usable Area 85 latitude or below
1.3 Effective Area 211.2 x 158.4 mm
1.4 Display pixels 640 x 480 dots
1.5 Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
1.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
1.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 59 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
1.8 Colors Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
1.9 Memory Capacity Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
1.10 Storage Capacity Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1.11 MOB 1 point
1.12 Quick Routes 1 course with 35 waypoints max.
1.13 Electronic Chart SD card - FURUNO or NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP eNt+ chart card
1.14 Alarms Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm
2 POWER SUPPLY
2.1 Rated Voltage/Current 12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.1 A (3.1-1.6 A)
2.2.1 Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
3.1 Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C
3.2 Relative Humidity 93% or less at +40°C
3.3 Waterproofing IPX5
3.4 Vibration IEC 60945-4
th
- 2 Hz-5Hz and up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ±10%
(7 m/s
2
maximum acceleration at 13.2 Hz);
- above 13.2 Hz and up to 100 Hz with a constant maximum
acceleration of 7 m/s
2
.
4 COATING COLOR
4.1 Display Unit N3.0
IN-1
INDEX
A
A/C RAIN....................................................2-4
A/C SEA .....................................................2-3
ACQ soft key ............................................2-27
ALARM key
plotter....................................................3-47
radar .....................................................2-22
sounder.................................................4-15
Alarms
anchor watch ........................................3-49
arrival....................................................3-47
audio.....................................................3-47
bottom...................................................4-16
CPA/TCPA ............................................2-32
fish........................................................4-16
fish(B/L) ................................................4-17
guard ....................................................2-22
lost target..............................................2-33
messages .............................................3-54
messages (plotter)................................3-53
messages (sounder).............................4-18
proximity ...............................................3-51
speed....................................................3-50
trip.........................................................3-51
water temperature ................................4-17
XTE (cross track error) .........................3-50
Anchor watch alarm..................................3-49
Anemometer display...................................3-5
Antenna height (GPS Receiver GP-310B) 7-27
ARP
acquisition of targets.............................2-27
activating ..............................................2-27
ARP SETUP menu ...............................2-27
CPA/TCPA alarm ..................................2-32
data.......................................................2-31
deactivating ..........................................2-27
lost target alarm....................................2-33
past position display .............................2-31
test..........................................................8-9
tracking termination ..............................2-29
vector....................................................2-30
Arrival alarm .............................................3-47
A-scope display ..........................................4-5
Audio alarm ..............................................3-47
Auto course-up mode................................. 3-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key.............................. 2-14
AUTO/D. BOX soft key............................... 4-7
B
Battery replacement................................... 8-2
Bearing measurement by EBL ................. 2-10
Bearing reference ...................................... 7-4
Bottom alarm ........................................... 4-16
Bottom discrimination display .................... 4-5
Bottom echo............................................. 4-20
Bottom-lock display.................................... 4-4
Bottom-zoom display ................................. 4-4
C
CHART DETAILS menu ........................... 7-14
CHART OFFSET soft key ........................ 7-13
Charts
C-MAP chart attributes......................... 7-15
cursor and data display (C-MAP) ......... 3-14
data for aids to navigation .....................3-11
icon data (C-MAP)................................ 3-15
icons ...................................................... 3-9
indices.................................................. 3-10
inserting ................................................. 1-3
Navionics chart attributes..................... 7-14
offsetting .............................................. 7-13
port service icons ................................. 3-12
tide information (C-MAP)...................... 3-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key .......................... 4-18
Clutter rejector ......................................... 4-10
C-MAP charts
attributes .............................................. 7-15
cursor and data display........................ 3-14
icon data .............................................. 3-15
tide information .................................... 3-16
Cold start (GPS Receiver GP-310B)........ 7-27
Colors
radar display .......................................... 7-6
radar echoes .......................................... 7-6
sounder echoes ................................... 4-14
Compass display........................................ 3-3
Controls
control unit ............................................. 1-1
INDEX
IN-2
Course-up mode
plotter.......................................................3-8
radar ........................................................2-7
CPA/TCPA alarm .......................................2-32
Cursor
display format ..........................................7-5
shifting ...................................................1-10
CURSOR soft key......................................2-12
D
Data boxes
erasing...................................................1-12
hiding .....................................................1-12
rearranging ............................................1-12
setup......................................................7-21
showing .................................................1-12
Deleting memory cards ...............................6-1
Depth measurement....................................4-9
Depth source ...............................................7-4
Depth unit ....................................................7-3
Diagnostics
ARP test...................................................8-9
GPS sensor test......................................8-8
keyboard test.........................................8-11
network sounder test...............................8-9
processor unit test...................................8-8
test menu.................................................8-7
test pattern.............................................8-10
DISP key......................................................1-7
Display modes.............................................1-6
DISPLY MODE soft key...............................4-1
E
E. AVG soft key..........................................2-20
E. STR soft key..........................................2-19
EBL soft key...............................................2-10
EBL/VRM key ..................2-9, 2-10, 2-15, 2-16
Echo averaging..........................................2-20
Echo offset (sounder)................................7-32
Echo stretch...............................................2-19
Echo trails
color.......................................................2-18
mode......................................................2-19
starting...................................................2-18
time........................................................2-17
EDIT XT-LMT soft key ......................... 3-4, 3-6
Error messages.........................................8-14
ETA calculation..........................................3-45
F
Fish alarm
sensitivity...............................................7-31
setting....................................................4-16
Fish alarm (B/L)
setting....................................................4-17
Fish school echo....................................... 4-21
Fix mode (GPS Receiver GP-310B).........7-27
FREQ LF/HF soft key..................................4-2
Function keys
function execution.................................1-13
setup (plotter)........................................ 7-11
setup (radar)............................................7-8
setup (sounder).....................................7-36
Fuse replacement ....................................... 8-2
G
GAIN key
radar........................................................ 2-2
sounder ................................................... 4-8
GENERAL SETUP menu............................ 7-1
Geodetic chart list .................................. AP-10
Geodetic datum
(GPS Receiver GP-310B).....................7-25
GPS Receiver GP-310B setup .................7-25
GPS sensor (GP-310B) test ....................... 8-8
GPS SETUP menu ...................................7-25
GPS status display....................................8-12
Grounding alarm
report..................................................... 3-54
setting....................................................3-52
Guard alarm
cancelling ..............................................2-23
setting....................................................2-22
H
Heading line .............................................. 2-11
Head-up mode ............................................ 2-7
HIDE/SHOW key.........................................1-2
Highway display.......................................... 3-6
HIWAY CNTRL soft key ..............................3-6
HL OFF soft key........................................ 2-11
Hot page setup..........................................7-22
Hue
sounder .................................................4-14
I
Icon..........................................................AP-11
I. REJ. soft key..........................................2-12
INDEX
IN-3
Interference rejection
radar ......................................................2-11
sounder..................................................4-10
K
Keyboard test ............................................8-11
Keying pulse..............................................7-32
L
Language.....................................................7-2
Latitude, longitude display...........................7-4
Lines
entering..................................................3-23
erasing...................................................3-26
type........................................................3-24
LOAD DATA menu.......................................6-3
Lost target alarm........................................2-33
M
Magnetic variation .......................................7-4
Maintenance
battery replacement.................................8-2
fuse replacement.....................................8-2
preventive................................................8-1
Trackball ..................................................8-3
Marker-zoom display...................................4-3
Marks
color.......................................................3-24
entering..................................................3-23
erasing all ..............................................3-25
erasing individual...................................3-25
shape.....................................................3-24
Memory
clearing..................................................8-13
testing......................................................8-7
Memory cards
deleting....................................................6-1
error messages........................................6-2
playing back.............................................6-3
saving data to ..........................................6-2
Memory I/O test...........................................8-7
Messages
memory cards..........................................6-2
plotter alarms.........................................3-53
sounder alarms......................................4-18
MOB mark .................................................1-11
Multiple echoes (radar)..............................2-34
N
Nav data display..........................................3-7
NAV DATA menu.......................................7-30
Nav data window.........................................3-1
Nav graphic display
anemometer display................................3-5
compass display......................................3-3
NAV OPTION menu..................................7-23
Navigation
canceling route navigation....................3-46
port, port services .................................3-41
quick point.............................................3-39
restarting ............................................... 3-44
routes ....................................................3-43
switching waypoints in a route..............3-45
waypoints ..............................................3-41
Navigator setup................................7-23, 7-25
NavNet
image source........................................... 1-9
receiving data from .................................6-4
Network sounder test..................................8-9
NEXT INFO soft key.........................3-53, 4-18
Noise limiter (sounder)..............................4-10
Noise rejection (radar) .............................. 2-11
North marker ............................................. 2-11
North-up mode
plotter......................................................3-8
radar........................................................2-7
O
Offset EBL.................................................2-15
OFFSET soft key..............................2-15, 2-16
P
Picture advance speed .............................4-12
PLOTTER SETUP menu ..........................7-10
PLOTTR CNTRL soft key ...........................1-8
Port, port services icons............................3-12
Position smoothing
(GPS Receiver GP-310B).....................7-26
POWER/TX key..........................................1-4
Presentation mode
plotter......................................................3-8
radar........................................................2-6
Processor unit test...................................... 8-8
Proximity alarm
plotter....................................................3-51
Pulselength (radar) ..................................... 2-5
INDEX
IN-4
R
Racon ........................................................2-36
RADAR SETTING menu .............................7-4
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key .........................2-1
Range
measurement by cursor (radar)...............2-8
measurement by range rings (radar).......2-8
measurement by VRM (radar).................2-9
plotter.......................................................3-9
radar ........................................................2-5
setup (radar)............................................7-7
setup (sounder) .....................................7-35
unit of measurement................................7-2
RANGE key
plotter.......................................................3-9
radar ........................................................2-5
sounder....................................................4-7
Remote controller
testing....................................................8-11
RESET XTE soft key........................... 3-4, 3-6
RINGS soft key............................................2-8
Routes
cancelling navigation of.........................3-46
connecting .............................................3-36
entering with cursor...............................3-34
entering with existing waypoints............3-33
erasing...................................................3-39
following.................................................3-43
inserting waypoint from plotter display..3-38
inserting waypoint from route list...........3-37
removing waypoint from ........................3-39
voyage based ........................................3-34
S
SART .........................................................2-35
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver GP-310B)
...............................................................7-27
SAVE DATA menu .......................................6-1
SAVE/MOB key .........................................1-11
Second-track echoes (radar).....................2-24
Sensor setup .............................................7-32
SENSOR SETUP menu ............................7-34
SENSOR SETUP soft key.........................7-32
Shadow sector...........................................2-35
Shift
automatic (radar)...................................2-14
manual (radar).......................................2-14
sounder....................................................4-8
SHIFT soft key................................... 2-14, 4-8
Sidelobe echoes .......................................2-34
Signal level erasure (sounder).................. 4-11
SIM SETUP menu.....................................1-14
Simulation display..................................... 1-14
Smoothing echoes (sounder)....................7-32
SNDR CNTRL soft key................................1-8
Soft keys .....................................................1-2
Speed alarm..............................................3-50
Speed display..............................................7-4
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B)..............................................7-26
SPLIT soft key............................................. 4-6
System configuration ...................................viii
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder)............7-31
T
TARGET INFO soft key.............................2-31
TARGET soft key ......................................2-17
TD display ...................................................7-3
TD setup
Decca.................................................... 7-29
Loran C .................................................7-29
TD SETUP menu ...................................... 7-28
Test menu.................................................... 8-7
Test pattern ...............................................8-10
Time measurement (sounder) .................... 4-9
Time notation ..............................................7-4
TLL data output (radar).............................2-21
TLL OUTPUT key......................................2-21
Track
displaying other targets'...............2-33, 3-18
displaying own ship's ............................ 3-18
erasing all own ship's............................ 3-23
erasing all targets’................................. 3-23
erasing own ship's by area ...................3-22
erasing own ship's by color...................3-22
memory distribution setting...................3-21
plotting interval......................................3-20
plotting method .....................................3-20
plotting of own ship's.............................3-19
TRACK HALT soft key............................... 3-19
TRACK RESUME soft key........................ 3-19
Trackball
cleaning...................................................8-3
operation ...............................................1-10
TRAIL COLOR soft key.............................2-18
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key............................2-18
TRAIL soft key...........................................2-17
TRAIL TIME soft key.................................2-17
INDEX
IN-5
Trip alarm...................................................3-51
Trip distance resetting ...............................3-55
Troubleshooting
general.....................................................8-4
plotter.......................................................8-5
radar ........................................................8-4
sounder....................................................8-6
True motion mode .......................................2-7
Tuning..........................................................2-2
TVG ...........................................................7-32
Tx sector (radar)..........................................7-5
V
Vector (ARP)..............................................2-30
Virtual image..............................................2-34
VRM (Variable Range Marker)
radar ........................................................2-9
sounder....................................................4-9
VRM soft key ...............................................2-9
W
W. MAN soft key........................................2-23
Watchman..................................................2-23
Water temperature alarm...........................4-17
Water temperature graph ..........................4-19
Water temperature unit................................7-4
Waypoint marker (radar)............................2-25
Waypoints
changing size.........................................3-31
color.......................................................3-27
editing from waypoint list.......................3-29
editing waypoint position .......................3-30
editing with cursor..................................3-30
entering at own ship position.................3-26
entering by range and bearing ..............3-28
entering with cursor...............................3-26
erasing from the menu ..........................3-31
erasing from waypoint list......................3-31
erasing with cursor ................................3-30
navigating to ..........................................3-41
searching...............................................3-32
shape.....................................................3-27
switching in route navigation .................3-45
White marker.............................................4-12
World time chart .......................................AP-2
WPT MK soft key.......................................2-25
X
XTE (cross track error) alarm ...................3-50
XTE monitor .........................................3-4, 3-6
Z
Zero line ....................................................4-20
Zoom .........................................................2-12
ZOOM/D. BOX soft key.............................2-13
199

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Furuno 1944CBB bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Furuno 1944CBB in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 3,11 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info